MSM-6226
User's Manual
24-Port L2 Plus Managed Fast Ethernet Switch
+ 2 TP/SFP Gigabit Dual Media
Release 1.0
2011, ICPDAS Manufacture Corporation. All rights reserved. All brand and product
names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Publication date:March., 2011
Revision A1
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
external or electrical stress, shipment, storage, accident, abuse or misuse, (3) Product is used in an extra hazardous environment or
activities, (4) any
serial number on the Product has been removed or defaced, or (5) this warranty will be of no effect if the repair is via anyone other than
Manufacture or the authorized agents. The maximum liability of ICPDAS Manufacture under this warranty is confined to the purchase price
of the Product covered by this warranty.
DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS ” AND ICPDAS MANUFACTURE AND ITS
LICENSORS MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REPSECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTAITON.
ICPDAS MANUFACTURE AND ITS LICENSORS DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUSIVE OF WITHOUT LIMITATION,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. FURTHER,
ICPDAS MANUFACTURE DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE, OR THE
RESULTS OF THE USE, OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED WRITTEN DOCUMENTAITON IN TERMS OF CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,
RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE.
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL ICPDAS MANUFACTURE OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER BE LIABLE TO
LICENSEE OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR (A) ANY MATTER BEYOND ITS REASONABLE CONTROL OR (B) ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR USE OF THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY
ICPDAS MANUFACTURE, EVEN IF ICPDAS MANUFACTURE HAS BEEN NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN
ADVANCE. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF ICPDAS MANUFACTURE IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THIS
AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO ICPDAS MANUFACTURE FOR THE LICENSE.
TERM AND TERMINATION. The License is effective until terminated; however, all of the restrictions in regard to ICPDAS Manufacture’s
copyright in the Software and related documentation will cease being effective at the date of expiration; Notwithstanding the termination or
expiration of the term of this agreement, it is acknowledged and agreed that those obligations relating to use and disclosure of ICPDAS
Manufacture’s confidential information shall survive. Licensee may terminate this License at any time by destroying the software together
with all copies thereof. This License will be immediately terminated if Licensee fails to comply with any term and condition of the Agreement.
Upon any termination of this License for any reason, Licensee shall discontinue to use the Software and shall destroy or return all copies of
the Software and the related documentation.
GENERAL. This License shall be governed by and construed pursuant to the laws of Taiwan. If any portion hereof is held to be invalid or
unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this License shall remain in full force and effect. Neither the License nor this Agreement is
assignable or transferable by Licensee without ICPDAS Manufacture’s prior written consent; any attempt to do so shall be void. This
License constitutes the entire License between the parties with respect to the use of the Software.
LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS IT, AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY
ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE
AGREEMENT BETWEEN ICPDAS MANUFACTURE AND LICENSEE.
Publication date: March., 2011
iii
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
CAUTION ........................................................................................................................... IV
ELECTRONIC EMISSION NOTICES....................................................................................... IV
1. Introduction.......................................................................................................................1
1-1.
OVERVIEW OF MSM-6226 .................................................................................... 1
1-2. CHECKLIST................................................................................................................... 4
1-3. FEATURES .................................................................................................................... 4
1-4. VIEW OF MSM-6226 .................................................................................................... 6
1-4-1. User Interfaces on the Front Panel (Button, LEDs and Plugs).......................... 6
1-4-2. User Interfaces on the Rear Panel...................................................................... 7
2. Installation.........................................................................................................................8
2-1. STARTING MSM-6226 UP ............................................................................................. 8
2-1-1. Hardware and Cable Installation....................................................................... 8
2-1-2. Installing Chassis to a 19-Inch Wiring Closet Rail .......................................... 10
2-1-3. Cabling Requirements ...................................................................................... 10
2-1-3-1. Cabling Requirements for TP Ports.........................................................................10
2-1-3-2. Cabling Requirements for 1000SX/LX SFP Module ..............................................10
2-1-3-3. Switch Cascading in Topology................................................................................ 11
2-1-4. Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226......................................... 14
2-1-4-1. Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226 through the Serial RS-232 Port
..............................................................................................................................................14
2-1-4-2. Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226 through the Ethernet Port......16
2-1-5. IP Address Assignment ..................................................................................... 17
2-2. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS............................................................................................... 21
3. Operation of Web-based Management..........................................................................23
3-1. WEB MANAGEMENT HOME OVERVIEW......................................................................... 25
3-1-1. System Information........................................................................................... 28
3-1-2. IP Configuration............................................................................................... 30
3-1-3. Time Configuration........................................................................................... 32
3-1-4. Account Configuration ..................................................................................... 35
3-1-5. Management Security ....................................................................................... 36
3-1-6. Virtual Stack...................................................................................................... 39
3-2. DHCP SNOOPING ...................................................................................................... 41
3-2-1. DHCP Snooping Config ................................................................................... 41
3-2-2. Trust Group....................................................................................................... 42
3-2-3. Lease List.......................................................................................................... 44
3-2-4. Counter............................................................................................................. 45
3-3. DHCP RELAY............................................................................................................. 46
3-4. IP-MAC BINDING....................................................................................................... 48
3-5. PORT CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................... 50
3-5-1.Port Status ......................................................................................................... 50
3-5-2. Port Configuration ........................................................................................... 54
3-5-3. Port Description............................................................................................... 56
3-5-4. Simple Counter................................................................................................. 57
3-5-5. Detail Counter.................................................................................................. 58
3-6. LOOP DETECTION....................................................................................................... 61
3-7. SNMP CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................. 62
3-8. DHCP BOOT.............................................................................................................. 64
3-9. MULTICAST................................................................................................................. 65
Publication date:March., 2011
iv
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9-1. IGMP Setting.................................................................................................... 65
3-9-2. IGMP VLAN ..................................................................................................... 66
3-9-3. Group Allow ..................................................................................................... 68
3-9-4. MVR Setting...................................................................................................... 69
3-9-5. Multicast Status ................................................................................................ 70
3-9-6. RADIUS IGMP................................................................................................. 71
3-10. LLDP ...................................................................................................................... 73
3-10-1 . LLDP State .................................................................................................... 73
3-10-2 . LLDP Entry ................................................................................................... 75
3-10-3 . LLDP Statistics.............................................................................................. 77
3-11. VLAN....................................................................................................................... 79
3-11-1. VLAN Mode .................................................................................................... 79
3-11-2. Tag-based Group............................................................................................. 82
3-11-3. PVID............................................................................................................... 84
3-11-4. Port-based Group ........................................................................................... 86
3-11-5. Management VLAN......................................................................................... 88
3-12. MAC TABLE.............................................................................................................. 89
3-13. GVRP CONFIGURATION............................................................................................ 96
3-14. STP CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................. 101
3-14-1. STP Status..................................................................................................... 101
3-14-2. STP Configuration........................................................................................ 103
3-14-3. STP Port Configuration................................................................................ 105
3-15. MSTP CONFIGURATION.......................................................................................... 108
3-15-1 Status ............................................................................................................. 108
3-15-2 Region Config................................................................................................ 109
3-15-3 Instance View..................................................................................................110
3-16. TRUNKING CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................118
3-17. 802.1X CONFIGURATION........................................................................................ 124
3-18. ALARM CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................... 134
3-19. CONFIGURATION.................................................................................................... 136
3-19-1. Save/Restore ................................................................................................. 137
3-19-2. Config File.................................................................................................... 140
3-20. SECURITY ............................................................................................................... 141
3-21. BANDWIDTH ........................................................................................................... 143
3-22. QOS(QUALITY OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION).......................................................... 147
3-23. ACL ...................................................................................................................... 151
3- 24. DIAGNOSTICS........................................................................................................ 160
3- 25. TFTP SERVER ....................................................................................................... 165
3-26. LOG ....................................................................................................................... 166
3-27. FIRMWARE UPGRADE............................................................................................. 167
3-28. REBOOT................................................................................................................. 168
3-29. LOGOUT................................................................................................................. 169
4. Operation of CLI Management ...................................................................................170
4-1. CLI MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................... 170
4-2. COMMANDS OF CLI.................................................................................................. 172
4-2-1. Global Commands of CLI............................................................................... 173
4-2-2. Local Commands of CLI................................................................................. 179
5. Maintenance.................................................................................................................278
5-1. RESOLVING
NO
LINK CONDITION .............................................................................. 278
5-2. Q&A........................................................................................................................ 278
Appendix A Technical Specifications..............................................................................279
Publication date: March., 2011
v
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Null Modem Cable Specifications .............................................................282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
Release
Date
2011/03/21
Revision
1.0
A1
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution
Circuit devices are sensitive to static electricity, which can damage their
delicate electronics. Dry weather conditions or walking across a carpeted floor may
cause you to acquire a static electrical charge.
To protect your device, always:
•
Touch the metal chassis of your computer to ground the static electrical charge
before you pick up the circuit device.
•
•
Pick up the device by holding it on the left and right edges only.
If you need using outdoor device connect to this device with cable then
you need to addition an arrester on the cable between outdoor device and
this device.
Fig. Addition an arrester between outdoor device and this switch
Electronic Emission Notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of part 15 of FCC Rules, which are
designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated
in a commercial environment.
European Community (CE) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the protection
requirements of European Emission Standard EN55022/EN61000-3 and the
Generic European Immunity Standard EN55024.
EMC:
EN55022(2003)/CISPR-2( 2002) class A
IEC61000-4-2 (2001)
IEC61000-4-3( 2002)
IEC61000-4-4(2001)
4K V CD, 8KV, AD
3V/m
1KV – (power line), 0.5KV – (signal line)
Publication date:March., 2011
Revision A1
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warrning:
•
Self-demolition on Product is strictly prohibited. Damage caused by self-
demolition will be charged for repairing fees.
•
•
Do not place product at outdoor or sandstorm.
Before installation, please make sure input power supply and product
specifications are compatible to each other.
•
•
Before importing / exporting configuration please make sure the
firmware version is always the same.
After firmware upgrade, the switch will remove the configuration
automatically to latest firmware version.
Publication date:March., 2011
iv
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this user’s manual
In this user’s manual, it will not only tell you how to install and connect your
network system but configure and monitor the MSM-6226 through the built-in CLI
and web by RS-232 serial interface and Ethernet ports step-by-step. Many
explanation in detail of hardware and software functions are shown as well as the
examples of the operation for web-based interface and command-line interface
(CLI).
Overview of this user’s manual
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Chapter 1 “Introduction” describes the features of MSM-6226
Chapter 2 “Installation”
Chapter 3 “Operation of Web-based Management”
Chapter 4 “Operation of CLI Management”
Chapter 5 “Maintenance”
Publication date:March., 2011
Revision A1
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
1-1. Overview of MSM-6226
MSM-6226, a 24 Fast Ethernet + 2 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch, which
implemented 24 10/100Mbps TP + 2 Gigabit dual media ports with TP/SFP(or
GBIC), is a standard switch that meets all IEEE 802.3/u/x/z Gigabit, Fast Ethernet
and Ethernet specifications. The switch can be managed through RS-232 serial port
via directly connection, or through Ethernet port using Telnet or Web-based
management unit, associated with SNMP agent. With the SNMP agent, the network
administrator can logon the switch to monitor, configure and control each port’s
activity in a friendly way. The overall network management is enhanced and the
network efficiency is also improved to accommodate high bandwidth applications.
In addition, the switch features comprehensive and useful function such as DHCP
Option 82, QoS (Quality of Service), Spanning Tree, VLAN, Port Trunking,
Bandwidth Control, Port Security, SNMP/RMON and IGMP Snooping capability via
the intelligent software. It is suitable for both metro-LAN and office application.
Others the new FW increase support the Power saving for reduce the power
consumption with "ActiPHY Power Management" and "PerfectReach Power
Management" two technique. The device also support DHCP Relay function The
DHCP Relay Agent makes it possible for DHCP broadcast messages to be sent
over routers that do not support forwarding of these types of messages. The DHCP
Relay Agent is therefore the routing protocol that enables DHCP clients to obtain IP
addresses from a DHCP server on a remote subnet, or which is not located on the
local subnet.
The switch also supports the IEEE Standard──802.1AB （Link Layer
Discovery Protocol），Provide more easy debug tool and enhance the networking
management availability, Others it can provide auto-discovery device and topology
providing.
•
Model Description
Model
Port 25, 26 Configurations
MSM-6226
Two types of media --- TP and SFP Fiber
10/100/1000Mbps TP is a standard Ethernet port that meets all IEEE
802.3/u/x/z Gigabit, Fast Ethernet specifications. 1000Mbps SFP Fiber transceiver
is a Gigabit Ethernet port that fully complies with all IEEE 802.3z and 1000Base-
SX/LX standards.
1000Mbps Single Fiber WDM (BiDi) transceiver is designed with an optic
Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) technology that transports bi-directional
full duplex signal over a single fiber simultaneously.
For upgrading firmware, please refer to the Section 3-20 or Section 4-2-2 for
more details. The switch will not stop operating while upgrading firmware and after
that, the configuration keeps unchanged.
•
Key Features in the Device
Publication date:March., 2011
Revision A1
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DHCP Snooping:
This feature enables the DHCP Snooping (MSM-6226 switch) to include
information about client when forwarding DHCP requests from a DHCP
client to a DHCP server via Trust Port. DHCP snooping can be configured
on LAN switches to harden the security on the LAN to only allow clients with
specific IP/MAC addresses to have access to the network. In short, DHCP
snooping ensures IP integrity on a Layer 2 switched domain.
QoS:
Support Quality of Service by the IEEE 802.1P standard. There are two
priority queue and packet transmission schedule using Weighted Round
Robin (WRR). User-defined weight classification of packet priority can be
based on either VLAN tag on packets or user-defined port priority.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP):
IEEE Standard──802.1AB （Link Layer Discovery Protocol），Provide
more easy debug tool and enhance the networking management availability,
Others it can provide auto-discovery device and topology providing
Spanning Tree:
Support IEEE 802.1D, IEEE 802.1w (RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol) standards.
VLAN:
Support Port-based VLAN and IEEE802.1Q Tag VLAN. Support 4K active
VLANs and VLAN ID 1~4094.
Port Trunking:
Support static port trunking and port trunking with IEEE 802.3ad LACP.
Bandwidth Control:
Support ingress and egress per port bandwidth control.
Port Security:
Support allowed, denied forwarding and port security with MAC address.
SNMP/RMON:
SNMP agent and RMON MIB. In the device, SNMP agent is a client
software which is operating over SNMP protocol used to receive the
command from SNMP manager (server site) and echo the corresponded
data, i.e. MIB object. Besides, SNMP agent will actively issue TRAP
information when happened.
RMON is the abbreviation of Remote Network Monitoring and is a branch of
the SNMP MIB.
The device supports MIB-2 (RFC 1213), Bridge MIB (RFC 1493), RMON
MIB (RFC 1757)-statistics Group 1,2,3,9, Ethernet-like MIB (RFC 1643) and
so on.
IGMP Snooping:
Support IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236): The function IGMP snooping is used
to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the
member ports, and, in nature, avoid wasting the bandwidth while IP
multicast packets are running over the network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
When queried, sends group membership reports to the
group.
When one of its hosts joins a multicast address group to
which none of its other hosts belong, sends unsolicited
group membership reports to that group.
•
When the last of its hosts in a particular multicast group
leaves the group, sends an unsolicited leave group
membership report to the all-routers group (244.0.0.2).
Power Saving:
The Power saving using the "ActiPHY Power Management" and
"PerfectReach Power Management" two techniques to detect the client idle
and cable length automatically and provides the different power. It could
efficient to save the switch power and reduce the power consumption.
Access Control List (ACL):
The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes. IPv4, ARP protocol, MAC and VLAN
parameters etc. Here we will just go over the standard and extended
access lists for TCP/IP. As you create ACEs for ingress classification, you
can assign a policy for each port, the policy number is 1-8, however, each
policy can be applied to any port. This makes it very easy to determine what
type of ACL policy you will be working with.
IP-MAC-Port Binding:
The IP network layer uses a four-byte address. The Ethernet link layer uses
a six-byte MAC address. Binding these two address types together allows
the transmission of data between the layers. The primary purpose of IP-
MAC binding is to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized
users. Only the authorized client can access the Switch’s port by checking
the pair of IP-MAC Addresses and port number with the pre-configured
database. If an unauthorized user tries to access an IP-MAC binding
enabled port, the system will block the access by dropping its packet.
Q-in-Q VLAN for performance & security:
The VLAN feature in the switch offers the benefits of both security and
performance. VLAN is used to isolate traffic between different users and
thus provides better security. Limiting the broadcast traffic to within the
same VLAN broadcast domain also enhances performance. Q-in-Q, the use
of double VLAN tags is an efficient method for enabling Subscriber
Aggregation. This is very useful in the MAN.
MVR:
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) can support carrier to serve content
provider using multicast for Video streaming application in the network.
Each content provider Video streaming has a dedicated multicast VLAN.
The MVR routes packets received in a multicast source VLAN to one or
more receive VLANs. Clients are in the receive VLANs and the multicast
server is in the source VLAN.
Publication date: March., 2011
3
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2. Checklist
Before you start installing the switch, verify that the package contains the
following:
MSM-6226 24 Fast Ethernet + 2 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch
Modules (optional)
Mounting Accessory (for 19” Rack Shelf)
This User's Manual in CD-ROM
AC Power Cord
RS-232 Cable
Please notify your sales representative immediately if any of the aforementioned
items is missing or damaged.
1-3. Features
The MSM-6226,
a
standalone off-the-shelf switch, provides the
comprehensive features listed below for users to perform system network
administration and efficiently and securely serve your network.
•
Hardware
• Supports 24-port 10/100M TP ports with Nway and auto MDIX function
• In MSM-6226, it supports 2 Gigabit dual media ports(TP/SFP) and 2 slots for
removable SFP module supporting 1000M SFP fiber module
• In MSM-6226D, it supports 2 Gigabit dual media ports(TP/GBIC) and 2 slots for
removable GBIC module supporting 1000M GBIC fiber module
• Power Saving with "ActiPHY Power Management" and "PerfectReach Power
Management" techniques.
• Supports on-line pluggable fiber transceiver modules
•Supports 256KB packet buffer and 128KB control memory
• Maximal packet length can be up to 1536 bytes
• Full-duplex flow control (IEEE802.3x) and half-duplex backpressure
• Extensive front-panel diagnostic LEDs; System: Power, CPURUN, ACT / FDX /
SPD(LEDSET), 10/100Mbps TP Port1-24:LINK/ACT, FDX, SPD,
10/100/1000Mbps/Fiber port 25, 26: LINK/ACT, FDX, SPD
•
Management
• Supports concisely the status of port and easily port configuration
• Supports per port traffic monitoring counters
• Supports a snapshot of the system Information when you login
• Supports port mirror function
• Supports the static trunk function
Publication date:March., 2011
4
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Supports 802.1Q VLAN with 4K entries.
• Supports user management and limits three users to login
• Supports DHCP Broadcasting Suppression to avoid network suspended or
crashed
• Supports to send the trap event while monitored events happened
• Supports Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP, IEEE802.1AB)
• Supports default configuration which can be restored to overwrite the current
configuration which is working on via web browser and CLI
• Supports on-line plug/unplug SFP/GBIC modules
• Supports 5 kinds of QoS, are as follows, MAC Priority, 802.1p Priority, IP TOS
Priority, and DiffServ DSCP Priority.
• Built-in web-based management and CLI management, providing a more
convenient UI for the user
• Supports port mirror function with ingress/egress traffic
• Supports rapid spanning tree (802.1w RSTP)
• Supports 802.1X port security on a VLAN
• Supports user management and only first login administrator can configure the
device. The rest of users can only view the switch
• SNMP access can be disabled and prevent from illegal SNMP access
• Supports Ingress, Non-unicast and Egress Bandwidth rating management
• The trap event and alarm message can be transferred via e-mail and mobile
phone short message
• Supports diagnostics to let administrator knowing the hardware status
• Supports external loopback test to check if the link is ok
• TFTP for firmware upgrade, system log upload and config file import/export
• Supports remote boot the device through user interface and SNMP
• Supports network time synchronization and daylight saving
• Supports 120 event log records in the main memory and display on the local
console
Publication date: March., 2011
5
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4. View of MSM-6226
Fig. 1-1 Full View of MSM-6226D with SFP Module
1-4-1. User Interfaces on the Front Panel (Button, LEDs and Plugs)
There are 24 TP Fast Ethernet ports and 2 slots for optional removable
modules on the front panel of the switch. LED display area, locating on the front
panel, contains a CPURUN, Power LED and 26 ports working status of the switch.
LEDSET Button
LEDSET button
is used to
Fast Ethernet
LED SET Mode: ACT/FDX/SPD
change the LED
display mode
TP Port Status:
Power Indication
Gigabit Dual Media Port:
RESET Button:
TP Port Status: Link
RESET button is used to
reset the management
system.
Fig. 1-2 Front View of MSM-6226 with SFP Module
Publication date:March., 2011
Revision A1
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• LED Indicators
LED
Color
Function
System LED
CPURUN
POWER
ACT
FDX
SPD
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Lit when CPU is on and good
Lit when AC power is on and good
Lit when LEDSET set on active mode
Lit when LEDSET set on full-duplex mode
Lit when LEDSET set on speed mode
10/100Mbps Ethernet TP Port 1 to 24 LED
Lit when connection with remote device is good
LNK
Green
Off when cable connection is not good
a. LEDSET set on ACT (active) mode:
Blinks when any traffic is present
Amber
b. LEDSET set on FDX (full-duplex) mode:
Lit when full-duplex mode is active
Blinks when any collision is present
c. LEDSET set on SPD (speed) mode:
Lit when 100Mbps speed is active
Off when 10Mbps speed is active
ACT/FDX/ SPD
(TP Port 1 to
24 LED)
10/100/1000Mbps Gigabit TP/Fiber Port 25, 26 LED
Lit when connection with remote device is good
Off when cable connection is not good
Lit when Fiber port is active
Off when TP port is active
LNK
FB
Green
Green
a. LEDSET set on ACT (active) mode:
Blinks when any traffic is present
Green
b. LEDSET set on FDX (full-duplex) mode:
Lit when full-duplex mode is active
Blinks when any collision is present
c. LEDSET set on SPD (speed) mode:
Lit when 1000Mbps speed is active
Off when 10/100Mbps speed is active
ACT/FDX/ SPD
(Port 25,
26 LED)
Table1-1
1-4-2. User Interfaces on the Rear Panel
One RS-232 DB-9 interface is offered for configuration or management. And
there is one AC power input socket for having the switch powered on or off.
AC Line 100-240V 50/60 Hz
RS-232 DB-9 Connector
Fig. 1-3 Rear View of MSM-6226/D
Publication date: March., 2011
7
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
2-1. Starting MSM-6226 Up
This section will give users a quick start for:
-
Hardware and Cable Installation
- Management Station Installation
- Software booting and configuration
2-1-1. Hardware and Cable Installation
At the beginning, please do first:
⇒ Wear a grounding device to avoid the damage from electrostatic discharge
• Installing Optional SFP/GBIC Fiber Transceivers to the MSM-6226 Managed
Switch
Note: If you have no modules, please skip this section.
Fig. 2-1 Installation of Optional SFP Fiber Transceiver
•Connecting the SFP Module to the Chassis:
The optional SFP modules are hot swappable, so you can plug or unplug it
before or after powering on.
1. Verify that the SFP module is the right model and conforms to the
chassis
2. Slide the module along the slot. Also be sure that the module is properly
seated against the slot socket/connector
3. Install the media cable for network connection
4. Repeat the above steps, as needed, for each module to be installed into
slot(s)
5. Have the power ON after the above procedures are done
Publication date:March., 2011
8
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
TP Port and Cable Installation
⇒ In the switch, TP port supports MDI/MDI-X auto-crossover, so both types of
cable, straight-through (Cable pin-outs for RJ-45 jack 1, 2, 3, 6 to 1, 2, 3, 6 in
10/100M TP; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 in Gigabit TP) and
crossed-over (Cable pin-outs for RJ-45 jack 1, 2, 3, 6 to 3, 6, 1, 2) can be used.
It means you do not have to tell from them, just plug it.
⇒ Use Cat. 5 grade RJ-45 TP cable to connect to a TP port of the switch and the
other end is connected to a network-aware device such as a workstation or a
server.
⇒ Repeat the above steps, as needed, for each RJ-45 port to be connected to a
Gigabit 10/100/1000 TP device.
Now, you can start having the switch in operation.
• Power On
The switch supports 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz power supply. The power
supply will automatically convert the local AC power source to DC power. It does not
matter whether any connection plugged into the switch or not when power on, even
modules as well. After the power is on, all LED indicators will light up immediately
and then all off except the power LED still keeps on. This represents a reset of the
system.
• Firmware Loading
After resetting, the bootloader will load the firmware into the memory. It will
take about 30 seconds, after that, the switch will flash all the LED once and
automatically performs self-test and is in ready state.
Publication date: March., 2011
9
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-2. Installing Chassis to a 19-Inch Wiring Closet Rail
Fig. 2-2
Caution: Allow a proper spacing and proper air ventilation for the cooling fan
at both sides of the chassis.
⇒
⇒
⇒
Wear a grounding device for electrostatic discharge.
Screw the mounting accessory to the front side of the switch (See Fig. 2-2).
Place the Chassis into the 19-inch wiring closet rail and locate it at the proper
position. Then, fix the Chassis by screwing it.
2-1-3. Cabling Requirements
To help ensure a successful installation and keep the network performance
good, please take a care on the cabling requirement. Cables with worse
specification will render the LAN to work poorly.
2-1-3-1. Cabling Requirements for TP Ports
⇒ For Fast Ethernet TP network connection
The grade of the cable must be Cat. 5 or Cat. 5e with a maximum length of
100 meters.
⇒ Gigabit Ethernet TP network connection
The grade of the cable must be Cat. 5 or Cat. 5e with a maximum length of
100 meters. Cat. 5e is recommended.
2-1-3-2. Cabling Requirements for 1000SX/LX SFP Module
It is more complex and comprehensive contrast to TP cabling in the fiber
media. Basically, there are two categories of fiber, multi mode (MM) and single
mode (SM). The later is categorized into several classes by the distance it supports.
They are SX, LX, LHX, XD, and ZX. From the viewpoint of connector type, there
mainly are LC and BiDi LC.
Gigabit Fiber with multi-mode LC SFP module
Gigabit Fiber with single-mode LC SFP module
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gigabit Fiber with BiDi LC 1310nm SFP module
Gigabit Fiber with BiDi LC 1550nm SFP module
The following table lists the types of fiber that we support and those else not
listed here are available upon request.
Multi-mode Fiber Cable and Modal Bandwidth
Multi-mode 62.5/125µm
Multi-mode 50/125µm
IEEE 802.3z
Gigabit Ethernet
1000SX 850nm
Modal
Modal
Distance
Bandwidth
Distance
Bandwidth
160MHz-Km
200MHz-Km
220m
275m
400MHz-Km
500m
550m
500MHz-Km
SFP. LC.S10/30/50/70/B0 Km (or GBIC.SC.S10/30/50 Km)
Single-mode Fiber 9/125µm
1000Base-
LX/LHX/XD/ZX
Single-mode transceiver 1310nm 10Km
Single-mode transceiver 1550nm 30, 50, 70, 110Km
TX(Transmit) 1310nm
RX(Receive) 1550nm
TX(Transmit) 1550nm
RX(Receive) 1310nm
SFP.BL3.S20 (or
GBIC.BS3.S20)
Single-Mode
*20Km
1000Base-LX
Single Fiber
WDM Module
SFP.BL5.S20 (or
GBIC.BS5.S20)
Single-Mode
*20Km
Table2-1
2-1-3-3. Switch Cascading in Topology
• Takes the Delay Time into Account
Theoretically, the switch partitions the collision domain for each port in switch
cascading that you may up-link the switches unlimitedly. In practice, the network
extension (cascading levels & overall diameter) must follow the constraint of the
IEEE 802.3/802.3u/802.3z and other 802.1 series protocol specifications, in which
the limitations are the timing requirement from physical signals defined by 802.3
series specification of Media Access Control (MAC) and PHY, and timer from some
OSI layer 2 protocols such as 802.1d, 802.1q, LACP and so on.
The fiber, TP cables and devices’ bit-time delay (round trip) are as follows:
1000Base-X TP, Fiber
100Base-TX TP
100Base-FX Fiber
Round trip Delay: 4096
Round trip Delay: 512
Cat. 5 TP Wire:
Fiber Cable
11.12/m
10.10/m
Cat. 5 TP Wire: 1.12/m
TP to fiber Converter: 56
Fiber Cable:
1.0/m
:
Bit Time unit : 1ns (1sec./1000 Mega bit)
Bit Time unit: 0.01µs (1sec./100 Mega bit)
Table 2-2
Sum up all elements’ bit-time delay and the overall bit-time delay of
wires/devices must be within Round Trip Delay (bit times) in a half-duplex network
segment (collision domain). For full-duplex operation, this will not be applied. You
may use the TP-Fiber module to extend the TP node distance over fiber optic and
Publication date: March., 2011
11
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
provide the long haul connection.
• Typical Network Topology in Deployment
A hierarchical network with minimum levels of switch may reduce the timing
delay between server and client station. Basically, with this approach, it will
minimize the number of switches in any one path; will lower the possibility of
network loop and will improve network efficiency. If more than two switches are
connected in the same network, select one switch as Level 1 switch and connect all
other switches to it at Level 2. Server/Host is recommended to connect to the Level
1 switch. This is general if no VLAN or other special requirements are applied.
Case1: All switch ports are in the same local area network. Every port can access
each other (See Fig. 2-3).
Fig. 2-3 No VLAN Configuration Diagram
If VLAN is enabled and configured, each node in the network that can
communicate each other directly is bounded in the same VLAN area.
Here VLAN area is defined by what VLAN you are using. The switch
supports both port-based VLAN and tag-based VLAN. They are different in practical
deployment, especially in physical location. The following diagram shows how it
works and what the difference they are.
Case2a: Port-based VLAN (See Fig.2-4).
Fig. 2-4 Port-based VLAN Diagram
1. The same VLAN members could not be in different switches.
2. Every VLAN members could not access VLAN members each other.
3. The switch manager has to assign different names for each VLAN groups
at one switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case 2b: Port-based VLAN (See Fig.2-5).
Fig. 2-5 Port-based VLAN Diagram
1. VLAN1 members could not access VLAN2, VLAN3 and VLAN4 members.
2. VLAN2 members could not access VLAN1 and VLAN3 members, but they could
access VLAN4 members.
3. VLAN3 members could not access VLAN1, VLAN2 and VLAN4.
4. VLAN4 members could not access VLAN1 and VLAN3 members, but they could
access VLAN2 members.
Case3a: The same VLAN members can be at different switches with the same VID
(See Fig. 2-6).
Fig. 2-6 Attribute-based VLAN Diagram
Publication date: March., 2011
13
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-4. Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226
We offer you three ways to startup the switch management function. They
are RS-232 console, CLI, and Web. Users can use any one of them to monitor and
configure the switch. You can touch them through the following procedures.
Section 2-1-4-1: Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226 through the
Serial RS-232 Port
Section 2-1-4-2: Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226 through the
Ethernet Port
Note: Please first modify the IP address, Subnet mask, Default gateway and DNS
through RS-232 console, and then do the next.
2-1-4-1. Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226 through the Serial
RS-232 Port
To perform the configuration through RS-232 console port, the switch’s serial
port must be directly connected to a DCE device, for example, a PC, through
RS-232 cable with DB-9 connector. Next, run a terminal emulator with the default
setting of the switch’s serial port. With this, you can communicate with the switch.
In the switch, RS-232 interface only supports baud rate 57.6k bps with 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit, no parity check and no flow control.
RS-232 DB-9 Connector
AC Line 100-240V 50/60 Hz
RS-232
MSM-6226 L2 Managed Switch
Default IP Setting:
IP address = 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.254
RS-232 cable with female
DB-9 connector at both ends
Fig. 2-7
Terminal or Terminal
To configure the switch, please follow the procedures below:
1. Find the RS-232 DB-9 cable with female DB-9 connector bundled.
Normally, it just uses pins 2, 3 and 7. See also Appendix B for more
details on Null Modem Cable Specifications.
2. Attaches the DB-9 female cable connector to the male serial RS-232
DB-9 connector on the switch.
3. Attaches the other end of the serial RS-232 DB-9 cable to PC’s serial
port, running a terminal emulator supporting VT100/ANSI terminal with
The switch’s serial port default settings. For example,
Windows98/2000/XP HyperTerminal utility.
Publication date:March., 2011
14
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The switch’s serial port default settings are listed as follows:
Baud rate
Stop bits
Data bits
Parity
57600
1
8
N
Flow control
none
4. When you complete the connection, then press <Enter> key. The login
prompt will be shown on the screen. The default username and
password are shown as below:
Username = admin
Password = admin
• Set IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address
Please refer to Fig. 2-7 CLI Management for details about ICPDAS
Manufacture’s setting. They are default setting of IP address. You can first either
configure your PC IP address or change IP address of the switch, next to change
the IP address of default gateway and subnet mask.
For example, your network address is 10.1.1.0, and subnet mask is
255.255.255.0. You can change the switch’s default IP address 192.168.1.1 to
10.1.1.1 and set the subnet mask to be 255.255.255.0. Then, choose your default
gateway, may be it is 10.1.1.254.
Default Value
IP Address
MSM-6226
Your Network Setting
192.168.1.1
10.1.1.1
Subnet
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.254
255.255.255.0
10.1.1.254
Default Gateway
Table 2-3
After completing these settings in the switch, it will reboot to have the
configuration taken effect. After this step, you can operate the management through
the network, no matter it is from a web browser or Network Management System
(NMS).
Fig. 2-8 the Login Screen for CLI
Publication date: March., 2011
15
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-4-2. Configuring the Management Agent of MSM-6226 through the
Ethernet Port
There are three ways to configure and monitor the switch through the
switch’s Ethernet port. They are CLI, Web browser and SNMP manager. The user
interface for the last one is NMS dependent and does not cover here. We just
introduce the first two types of management interface.
MSM-6226 L2 Managed Switch
Default IP Setting:
IP = 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.254
Assign a reasonable IP address,
For example:
IP = 192.168.1.100
Ethernet LAN
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.254
Fig. 2-9
• Managing MSM-6226 through Ethernet Port
Before you communicate with the switch, you have to finish first the
configuration of the IP address or to know the IP address of the switch. Then,
follow the procedures listed below.
1. Set up a physical path between the configured the switch and a PC by a
qualified UTP Cat. 5 cable with RJ-45 connector.
Note: If PC directly connects to the switch, you have to setup the same
subnet mask between them. But, subnet mask may be different for the PC
in the remote site. Please refer to Fig. 2-9 about the switch’s default IP
address information.
2. Run CLI or web browser and follow the menu. Please refer to Chapter 3
and Chapter 4.
Fig. 2-10 the Login Screen for Web
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-5. IP Address Assignment
For IP address configuration, there are three parameters needed to be filled
in. They are IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS.
IP address:
The address of the network device in the network is used for internetworking
communication. Its address structure looks is shown in the Fig. 2-11. It is “classful”
because it is split into predefined address classes or categories.
Each class has its own network range between the network identifier and
host identifier in the 32 bits address. Each IP address comprises two parts: network
identifier (address) and host identifier (address). The former indicates the network
where the addressed host resides, and the latter indicates the individual host in the
network which the address of host refers to. And the host identifier must be unique
in the same LAN. Here the term of IP address we used is version 4, known as IPv4.
32 bits
Network identifier
Host identifier
Fig. 2-11 IP address structure
With the classful addressing, it divides IP address into three classes, class A,
class B and class C. The rest of IP addresses are for multicast and broadcast. The
bit length of the network prefix is the same as that of the subnet mask and is
denoted as IP address/X, for example, 192.168.1.0/24. Each class has its address
range described below.
Class A:
Address is less than 126.255.255.255. There are a total of 126 networks can
be defined because the address 0.0.0.0 is reserved for default route and
127.0.0.0/8 is reserved for loopback function.
Bit #
0 1
7 8
31
0
Network address
Host address
Class B:
IP address range between 128.0.0.0 and 191.255.255.255. Each class B
network has a 16-bit network prefix followed 16-bit host address. There are 16,384
(2^14)/16 networks able to be defined with a maximum of 65534 (2^16 –2) hosts
per network.
date: March., 2011
Bit #
01 2
15 16
31
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Network address
Host address
Class C:
IP address range between 192.0.0.0 and 223.255.255.255. Each class C
network has a 24-bit network prefix followed 8-bit host address. There are
2,097,152 (2^21)/24 networks able to be defined with a maximum of 254 (2^8 –2)
hosts per network.
Bit # 0 1 2 3
23 24
31
110
Network address
Host address
Class D and E:
Class D is a class with first 4 MSB (Most significance bit) set to 1-1-1-0 and
is used for IP Multicast. See also RFC 1112. Class E is a class with first 4 MSB set
to 1-1-1-1 and is used for IP broadcast.
According to IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority), there are three
specific IP address blocks reserved and able to be used for extending internal
network. We call it Private IP address and list below:
Class A
Class B
Class C
10.0.0.0 --- 10.255.255.255
172.16.0.0 --- 172.31.255.255
192.168.0.0 --- 192.168.255.255
Please refer to RFC 1597 and RFC 1466 for more information.
Subnet mask:
It means the sub-division of a class-based network or a CIDR block. The
subnet is used to determine how to split an IP address to the network prefix and the
host address in bitwise basis. It is designed to utilize IP address more efficiently and
ease to manage IP network.
For a class B network, 128.1.2.3, it may have a subnet mask 255.255.0.0 in
default, in which the first two bytes is with all 1s. This means more than 60
thousands of nodes in flat IP address will be at the same network. It’s too large to
manage practically. Now if we divide it into smaller network by extending network
prefix from 16 bits to, say 24 bits, that’s using its third byte to subnet this class B
network. Now it has a subnet mask 255.255.255.0, in which each bit of the first
three bytes is 1. It’s now clear that the first two bytes is used to identify the class B
network, the third byte is used to identify the subnet within this class B network and,
of course, the last byte is the host number.
Not all IP address is available in the sub-netted network. Two special
addresses are reserved. They are the addresses with all zero’s and all one’s host
number. For example, an IP address 128.1.2.128, what IP address reserved will be
looked like? All 0s mean the network itself, and all 1s mean IP broadcast.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network
Subnet
10000000.00000001.00000010.1 0000000
25 bits
All 0s = 128.1.2.128
All 1s= 128.1.2.255
1 0000000
1 1111111
In this diagram, you can see the subnet mask with 25-bit long,
255.255.255.128, contains 126 members in the sub-netted network. Another is that
the length of network prefix equals the number of the bit with 1s in that subnet mask.
With this, you can easily count the number of IP addresses matched. The following
table shows the result.
Prefix Length No. of IP matched No. of Addressable IP
/32
/31
/30
/29
/28
/27
/26
/25
/24
/23
/22
/21
/20
/19
/18
/17
/16
1
2
-
-
4
2
8
6
16
14
32
30
64
62
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
65536
126
254
510
1022
2046
4094
8190
16382
32766
65534
Table 2-4
According to the scheme above, a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 will partition a
network with the class C. It means there will have a maximum of 254 effective
nodes existed in this sub-netted network and is considered a physical network in an
autonomous network. So it owns a network IP address which may looks like
168.1.2.0.
Publication date: March., 2011
19
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the subnet mask, a bigger network can be cut into small pieces of
network. If we want to have more than two independent networks in a worknet, a
partition to the network must be performed. In this case, subnet mask must be
applied.
For different network applications, the subnet mask may look like
255.255.255.240. This means it is a small network accommodating a maximum of
15 nodes in the network.
Default gateway:
For the routed packet, if the destination is not in the routing table, all the
traffic is put into the device with the designated IP address, known as default router.
Basically, it is a routing policy. The gateway setting is used for Trap Events Host
only in the switch.
For assigning an IP address to the switch, you just have to check what the IP
address of the network will be connected with the switch. Use the same network
address and append your host address to it.
Fig. 2-12
First, IP Address: as shown in the Fig. 2-12, enter “192.168.1.1”, for instance.
For sure, an IP address such as 192.168.1.x must be set on your PC.
Second, Subnet Mask: as shown in the Fig. 2-12, enter “255.255.255.0”. Any
subnet mask such as 255.255.255.x is allowable in this case.
DNS:
The Domain Name Server translates human readable machine name to IP
address. Every machine on the Internet has a unique IP address. A server generally
has a static IP address. To connect to a server, the client needs to know the IP of
the server. However, user generally uses the name to connect to the server. Thus,
the switch DNS client program (such as a browser) will ask the DNS to resolve the
IP address of the named server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2. Typical Applications
The MSM-6226 implements 24 Fast Ethernet TP ports with auto MDIX and 2
Gigabit dual media ports with SFP/GBIC for removable module supported
comprehensive fiber types of connection, including LC, BiDi LC for SFP and LC/SC,
BiDi LC/SC for GBIC. For more details on the specification of the switch, please
refer to Appendix A.
The switch is suitable for the following applications.
Central Site/Remote site application is used in carrier or ISP (See Fig. 2-13)
Peer-to-peer application is used in two remote offices (See Fig. 2-14)
Office network(See Fig. 2-15)
Central Site
Fig. 2-13 Network Connection between Remote Site and Central Site
Fig. 2-13 is a system wide basic reference connection diagram. This diagram
demonstrates how the switch connects with other network devices and hosts.
Publication date:March., 2011
21
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 2-14 Peer-to-peer Network Connection
Fig. 2-15 Office Network Connection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation of Web-based
Management
This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the MSM-6226
through the web user interface it supports, to access and manage the 24
10/100Mbps TP + 2 Gigabit dual media ports with TP/SFP(or GBIC)Fiber
management Ethernet switch. With this facility, you can easily access and monitor
through any one port of the switch all the status of the switch, including MIBs status,
each port activity, Spanning tree status, port aggregation status, multicast traffic,
VLAN and priority status, even illegal access record and so on.
The default values of the managed switch are listed in the table below:
IP Address
192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway 192.168.1.254
Username
Password
admin
admin
Table 3-1
After the managed switch has been finished configuration in the CLI via the
switch’s serial interface, you can browse it. For instance, type http://192.168.1.1 in
the address row in a browser, it will show the following screen (see Fig.3-1) and ask
you inputting username and password in order to login and access authentication.
The default username and password are both “admin”. For the first time to use,
please enter the default username and password, then click the <Login> button.
The login process now is completed.
Just click the link of “Forget Password” in WebUI (See Fig. 3-1) or input
“Ctrl+Z” in CLI’s login screen (See Fig. 4-1~4-2) in case the user forgets the
manager’s password. Then, the system will display a serial No. for the user. Write
down this serial No. and contact your vendor, the vendor will give you a temporary
password. Use this new password as ID and Password, and it will allow the user to
login the system with manager authority temporarily. Due to the limit of this new
password, the user only can login the system one time, therefore, please modify
your password immediately after you login in the system successfully.
In this login menu, you have to input the complete username and password
respectively, the switch will not give you a shortcut to username automatically. This
looks inconvenient, but safer.
In the switch, it supports a simple user management function allowing only
one administrator to configure the system at the same time. If there are two or more
users using administrator’s identity, the switch will allow the only one who logins first
to configure the system. The rest of users, even with administrator’s identity, can
only monitor the system. For those who have no administrator’s identity, can only
monitor the system. There are only a maximum of three users able to login
simultaneously in the switch.
Publication date: March., 2011
23
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To optimize the display effect, we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6.0
above, Netscape V7.1 above or FireFox V1.00 above and have the resolution
1024x768. The switch supported neutral web browser interface.
In Fig. 3-2, for example, left section is the whole function tree with web user
interface and we will travel it through this chapter.
Fig. 3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1. Web Management Home Overview
After you login, the switch shows you the system information as Fig. 3-2. This
page is default and tells you the basic information of the system, including “Model
Name”, “System Description”, “Location”, “Contact”, “Device Name”, “System Up
Time”, “Current Time”, “BIOS Version”, “Firmware Version”, “Hardware-Mechanical
Version”, “Serial Number”, “Host IP Address”, “Host MAC Address”, “Device Port”,
“RAM Size” and “Flash Size”. With this information, you will know the software
version used, MAC address, serial number, how many ports good and so on. This is
helpful while malfunctioning.
Fig. 3-2
•
The Information of Page Layout
On the top side, it shows the front panel of the switch. In the front panel, the
linked ports will display green; as to the ports, which are link off, they will be
dark. For the optional modules, the slot will show only a cover plate if no
module exists and will show a module if a module is present. The image of
module depends on the one you inserted. The same, if disconnected, the port
will show just dark, if linked, green.
In this device, there are clicking functions on the panel provided for the
information of the ports. These are very convenient functions for browsing the
information of a single port. When clicking the port on the front panel, an
information window for the port will be pop out. (See Fig. 3-3)
Publication date:March., 2011
25
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-3 port detail information
In Fig. 3-3, it shows the basic information of the clicked port. With this, you’ll
see the information about the port status, traffic status and bandwidth rating for
egress and ingress respectively.
On the left-top corner, there is a pull-down list for Auto Logout. For the sake of
security, we provide auto-logout function to protect you from illegal user as you
are leaving. If you do not choose any selection in Auto Logout list, it means
you turn on the Auto Logout function and the system will be logged out
automatically when no action on the device 3 minutes later. If OFF is chosen,
the screen will keep as it is. Default is ON.
On the left side, the main menu tree for web is listed in the page. They are
hierarchical menu. Open the function folder, a sub-menu will be shown. The
functions of each folder are described in its corresponded section respectively.
When clicking it, the function is performed. The following list is the full function
tree for web user interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root
System
DHCP Relay
Port
DHCP Snooping
IP-MAC Binding
Loop Detection
DHCP Boot
LLDP
SNMP
Multicast
VLAN
MAC Table
STP
GVRP
MSTP
Trunk
802.1X
Alarm
TACACS+
Configuration
Bandwidth
ACL
Security
QoS
Diagnostics
Log
TFTP Server
Firmware Upgrade
Logout
Reboot
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-1. System Information
Function name:
System Information
Function description:
Show the basic system information.
Fig. 3-3.1 System information
Parameter description:
Model name:
The model name of this device.
System description:
As it is, this tells what this device is. Here, it is “24 Fast Ethernet + 2
Gigabit L2 Managed Switch”.
Location:
Basically, it is the location where this switch is put. User-defined.
Contact:
For easily managing and maintaining device, you may write down the
contact person and phone here for getting help soon. You can configure
this parameter through the device’s user interface or SNMP.
Device name:
The name of the switch. User-defined. Default is MSM-6226.
System up time:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The time accumulated since this switch is powered up. Its format is day,
hour, minute, second.
Current time:
Show the system time of the switch. Its format: day of week, month, day,
hours : minutes : seconds, year. For instance, Tue Apr 20 23:25:58 2004
BIOS version:
The version of the BIOS in this switch.
Firmware version:
The firmware version in this switch.
Hardware-Mechanical version:
The version of Hardware and Mechanical. The figure before the hyphen
is the version of electronic hardware; the one after the hyphen is the
version of mechanical.
Serial number:
The serial number is assigned by the Manufacturer.
Host IP address:
The IP address of the switch.
Host MAC address:
It is the Ethernet MAC address of the management agent in this switch.
Device Port:
Show all types and numbers of the port in the switch.
RAM size:
The size of the DRAM in this switch.
Flash size:
The size of the flash memory in this switch.
CPU Loading:
The loading of the CPU on this switch.
Publication date: March., 2011
29
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-2. IP Configuration
IP configuration is one of the most important configurations in the switch.
Without the proper setting, network manager will not be able to manage or view the
device. The switch supports both manual IP address setting and automatic IP
address setting via DHCP server. When IP address is changed, you must reboot the
switch to have the setting taken effect and use the new IP to browse for web
management and CLI management.
Function name:
IP Configuration
Function description:
Set IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and DNS for the switch.
Fig. 3-4 IP Address Configuration
Parameter description:
DHCP Setting:
DHCP is the abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Here
DHCP means a switch to turn ON or OFF the function.
The switch supports DHCP client used to get an IP address automatically
if you set this function “Enable”. When enabled, the switch will issue the
request to the DHCP server resided in the network to get an IP address.
If DHCP server is down or does not exist, the switch will issue the
request and show IP address is under requesting, until the DHCP server
is up. Before getting an IP address from DHCP server, the device will not
continue booting procedures. If set this field “Disable”, you’ll have to
input IP address manually. For more details about IP address and DHCP,
please see the Section 2-1-5 “IP Address Assignment” in this manual.
Default: Disable
IP address:
Users can configure the IP settings and fill in new values if users set the
DHCP function “Disable”. Then, click <Apply> button to update.
When DHCP is disabled, Default: 192.168.1.1
If DHCP is enabled, this field is filled by DHCP server and will not allow
user manually set it any more.
Subnet mask:
Publication date:March., 2011
30
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subnet mask is made for the purpose to get more network address
because any IP device in a network must own its IP address, composed
of Network address and Host address, otherwise can’t communicate with
other devices each other. But unfortunately, the network classes A, B,
and C are all too large to fit for almost all networks, hence, subnet mask
is introduced to solve this problem. Subnet mask uses some bits from
host address and makes an IP address looked Network address, Subnet
mask number and host address. It is shown in the following figure. This
reduces the total IP number of a network able to support, by the amount
of 2 power of the bit number of subnet number (2^(bit number of subnet
number)).
32 bits
Host ID
Network ID
Network ID
Host ID
Subnet number
Subnet mask is used to set the subnet mask value, which should be the
same value as that of the other devices resided in the same network it
attaches.
For more information, please also see the Section 2-1-5 “IP Address
Assignment” in this manual.
Default: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway:
Set an IP address for a gateway to handle those packets that do not
meet the routing rules predefined in the device. If a packet does not meet
the criteria for other pre-defined path, it must be forwarded to a default
router on a default path. This means any packet with undefined IP
address in the routing table will be sent to this device unconditionally.
Default: 192.168.1.254
DNS:
It is Domain Name Server used to serve the translation between IP
address and name address.
The switch supports DNS client function to re-route the mnemonic name
address to DNS server to get its associated IP address for accessing
Internet. User can specify a DNS IP address for the switch. With this, the
switch can translate a mnemonic name address into an IP address.
There are two ways to specify the IP address of DNS. One is fixed mode,
which manually specifies its IP address, the other is dynamic mode,
which is assigned by DHCP server while DHCP is enabled. DNS can
help you easily remember the mnemonic address name with the
meaningful words in it. Default is no assignment of DNS address.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Publication date: March., 2011
31
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-3. Time Configuration
The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via
NTP. Manual setting is simple and you just input “Year”, “Month”, “Day”, “Hour”,
“Minute” and “Second” within the valid value range indicated in each item. If you
input an invalid value, for example, 61 in minute, the switch will clamp the figure to
59.
NTP is a well-known protocol used to synchronize the clock of the switch
system time over a network. NTP, an internet draft standard formalized in RFC 1305,
has been adopted on the system is version 3 protocol. The switch provides four
built-in NTP server IP addresses resided in the Internet and an user-defined NTP
server IP address. The time zone is Greenwich-centered which uses the expression
form of GMT+/- xx hours.
Function name:
Time
Function description:
Set the system time by manual input or set it by syncing from Time servers.
The function also supports daylight saving for different area’s time adjustment.
Fig. 3-5
Parameter description:
Current Time:
Show the current time of the system.
Publication date:March., 2011
32
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual:
This is the function to adjust the time manually. Filling the valid figures in
the fields of Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute and Second respectively and
press <Apply> button, time is adjusted. The valid figures for the
parameter Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute and Second are >=2000, 1-12,
1-31, 0-23, 0-59 and 0-59 respectively. Input the wrong figure and press
<Apply> button, the device will reject the time adjustment request. There
is no time zone setting in Manual mode.
Default: Year = 2000, Month = 1, Day = 1
Hour = 0,
Minute = 0, Second = 0
NTP:
NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time
based Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). If use the NTP mode and select a
built-in NTP time server or manually specify an user-defined NTP server
as well as Time Zone, the switch will sync the time in a short after
pressing <Apply> button. Though it synchronizes the time automatically,
NTP does not update the time periodically without user’s processing.
Time Zone is an offset time off GMT. You have to select the time zone
first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine
this time zone offset and updated NTP time to come out the local time,
otherwise, you will not able to get the correct time. The switch supports
configurable time zone from –12 to +13 step 1 hour.
Default Time zone: +8 Hrs.
Daylight Saving:
Daylight saving is adopted in some countries. If set, it will adjust the time
lag or in advance in unit of hours, according to the starting date and the
ending date. For example, if you set the day light saving to be 1 hour.
When the time passes over the starting time, the system time will be
increased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over. And
when the time passes over the ending time, the system time will be
decreased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over.
The switch supports valid configurable day light saving time is –5 ~ +5
step one hour. The zero for this parameter means it need not have to
adjust current time, equivalent to in-act daylight saving. You don’t have to
set the starting/ending date as well. If you set daylight saving to be non-
zero, you have to set the starting/ending date as well; otherwise, the
daylight saving function will not be activated.
Default for Daylight Saving: 0.
The following parameters are configurable for the function Daylight
Saving and described in detail.
Day Light Saving Start :
This is used to set when to start performing the day light saving time.
Publication date: March., 2011
33
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mth:
Range is 1 ~ 12.
Default: 1
Day:
Hour:
Range is 1 ~ 31.
Default: 1
Range is 0 ~ 23.
Default: 0
Day Light Saving End :
This is used to set when to stop performing the daylight saving time.
Mth:
Range is 1 ~ 12.
Default: 1
Day:
Range is 1 ~ 31.
Default: 1
Hour:
Range is 0 ~ 23.
Default: 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-4. Account Configuration
In this function, only administrator can create, modify or delete the username
and password. Administrator can modify other guest identities’ password without
confirming the password but it is necessary to modify the administrator-equivalent
identity. Guest-equivalent identity can modify his password only. Please note that
you must confirm administrator/guest identity in the field of Authorization in advance
before configuring the username and password. Only one administrator is allowed
to exist and unable to be deleted. In addition, up to 4 guest accounts can be created.
The default setting for user account is:
Username : admin
Password : admin
The default setting for guest user account is:
Username : guest
Password : guest
Fig. 3-6
Publication date:March., 2011
35
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-5. Management Security
Through the management security configuration, the manager can do the
strict setup to control the switch and limit the user to access this switch.
The following rules are offered for the manager to manage the switch:
Rule 1) : When no lists exists, then it will accept all connections.
Accept
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule 2) : When only “accept lists” exist, then it will deny all connections,
excluding the connection inside of the accepting range.
Accept Deny
Accept
Deny Accept
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule 3) : When only “deny lists” exist, then it will accept all connections,
excluding the connection inside of the denying range.
Deny
Accept Deny
Accept Deny
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule 4) : When both “accept and deny” lists exist, then it will deny all
connections, excluding the connection inside of the accepting range.
Accept Deny
Deny
Deny Accept
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule 5) : When both “accept and deny” lists exist, then it will deny all
connections, excluding the connection inside of the accepting range and NOT
inside of the denying range at the same time.
Accept
Accept
Deny
Deny| Acc | Deny | Acc
| Deny
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Publication date:March., 2011
Revision A1
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Management Security Configuration
Function description:
The switch offers Management Security Configuration function. With this
function, the manager can easily control the mode that the user connects to
the switch. According to the mode, users can be classified into two types:
Those who are able to connect to the switch (Accept) and those who are
unable to connect to the switch (Deny). Some restrictions also can be placed
on the mode that the user connect to the switch, for example, we can decide
that which VLAN VID is able to be accepted or denied by the switch, the IP
range of the user could be accepted or denied by the switch, the port that the
user is allowed or not allowed to connect with the switch, or the way of
controlling and connecting to the switch via Http, Telnet or SNMP.
Fig. 3-7
Parameter description:
Name:
A name is composed of any letter (A-Z, a-z) and digit (0-9) with maximal
8 characters.
VID:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid VLAN VID,
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. When you choose
“Custom”, you can fill in VID number. The valid VID range is 1~4094.
Publication date: March., 2011
37
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Range:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid IP Range,
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. In case that” Custom”
had been chosen, you can assigned effective IP range. The valid range
is 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255.
Incoming Port:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid Port Range,
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. You can select the ports
that you would like them to be worked and restricted in the management
security configuration if ”Custom” had been chosen.
Access Type:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid Access Type
,
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. “Http”, “Telnet” and
“SNMP” are three ways for the access and managing the switch in case
that” Custom” had been chosen.
Action:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid Action Type
,
including “Deny” and “Accept”. Default is “Deny”. When you choose
“Deny” action, you will be restricted and refused to manage the swtich
due to the “Access Type” you choose. However, while you select
“Accept” action, you will have the authority to manage the switch
.
Edit/Create:
A new entry of Management Security Configuration can be created after
the parameters as mentioned above had been setup and then press
<Edit/Create> button. Of course, the existed entry also can be modified
by pressing this button.
Delete:
Remove the existed entry of Management Security Configuration from
the management security table.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-6. Virtual Stack
Function name:
Virtual Stack
Function description:
Virtual Stack Management(VSM) is the group management function. Through
the proper configuration of this function, switches in the same LAN will be
grouped automatically. And among these switch, one switch will be a master
machine, and the others in this group will become the slave devices.
VSM offers a simple centralized management function. It is not necessary to
remember the address of all devices, manager is capable of managing the
network with knowing the address of the Master machine. Instead of SNMP or
Telnet UI, VSM is only available in Web UI. While one switch become the
Master, two rows of buttons for group device will appear on the top of its Web
UI. By pressing these buttons, user will be allowed to connect the Web UI of
the devices of the group in the same window without the login of these device.
The most top-left button is only for Master device(See Fig.3-9). The
background color of the button you press will be changed to represent that the
device is under your management.
The device of the group will be shown as station address ( the last number of
IP Address) + device name on the button (e.g. 196_ MSM-6226 ), otherwise it
will show ” ---- “ if no corresponding device exists.
Once the devices join the group successfully, then they are merely able to be
managed via Master device, and user will fail to manage them via
telnet/console/web individually.
Up to 16 devices can be grouped for VSM, however, only one Master is
allowed to exist in each group. For Master redundancy, user may configure
more than two devices as Master device, however, the Master device with the
smaller MAC value will be the Master one. All of these 16 devices can
become Master device and back up with each other .
Publication date:March., 2011
39
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-8
Parameter description:
State:
It is used for the activation or de-activation of VSM. Default is Enable.
Role:
The role that the switch would like to play in virtual stack. Two types of
roles, including master and slave are offered for option. Default is Master.
Group ID:
It is the group identifier (GID) which signs for VSM. Valid letters are A-Z,
a-z, 0-9, “ “ and “_” characters. The maximal length is 15 characters.
-
Fig. 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. DHCP Snooping
DHCP Snooping
Config
Trust Group
Lease List
Counter
Fig.3-9-1
3-2-1. DHCP Snooping Config
Function name:
DHCP Snooping Config
Function description:
The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully
controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping. DHCP
snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or
other devices which send port-related information to a DHCP server. This
information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port.
Fig. 3-10
Parameter description:
State:
It is used for the activation or de-activation of DHCP Snooping. Default is
disable.
Per Port Client Count Setup:
The limitation per port client count setup. If the current client count was
lower than the value which you set on switch then the link will be keep.
The maximum is 512 and default is 128.
Publication date:March., 2011
41
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2-2. Trust Group
Function name:
Trust Group
Function description:
The function which you can configure the Group as trusted or untrusted. You
must to set the trust port1 and port2 on the Switch, Option 82 state with
“ Disable”/ “Enable”, Action with “Replace”/ “Drop” /” Keep” , DHCP Server
VLAN ID, DHCP Server IP address. and Trust VID.
Fig. 3-10.1
Parameter description:
Server Port1, 2:
To configure the port which DHCP Server connect to on the Switch.
Option 82:
To enable or disable the DHCP Option 82 function on the Switch.
Action:
When switch receive the packet with Option 82 then action with
“ Replace”, “ Drop” or “Keep. It need to coordinate with Option 82.
Server VID:
Publication date:March., 2011
42
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DHCP Server belong the VLAN member ID which you set on the
Switch. ;Obey by the PVID on the Switch.
Server IP:
The DHCP Server IP address. It allows the IP address with 0.0.0.0.
Trust VID:
The DHCP client belong the VLAN member ID which you set on the
Switch. It can be different with server VID; Obey by the PVID on the
Switch.
Edit/ Create:
It allows you to edit or create a DHCP snooping trust group rule on the
switch.
Delete:
To delete a DHCP snooping trust group entry on the switch.
Apply:
To save the configuration to the switch.
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2-3. Lease List
Function name:
Lease List
Function description:
To record and display the DHCP Snooping concurrent lease List table.
Fig. 3-10.2
Parameter description:
MAC:
To display the DHCP server Client MAC address.
IP:
To display the client’s IP address which got from the DHCP server.
Port:
To display the client belong the port on the switch.
VID:
To display the client belong the VLAN member ID on the switch.
Lease:
To display the client lease time state, includes Day.Hour:Min:Sec.
Publication date:March., 2011
Revision A1
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2-4. Counter
Function name:
Counter
Function description:
To display the DHCP Snooping packet received per port detail counter
information. .
Fig. 3-10.2
Parameter description:
Port No:
The port number on the switch. .
Discovery:
To display discovery of DHCP request packet received by the port on the
switch .
Publication date:March., 2011
45
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. DHCP Relay
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a service that runs at the
application layer of the TCP/IP protocol stack to dynamically assign IP addresses to
DHCP clients. DHCP clients request IP addresses, and obtain leases for IP
addresses from the DHCP server.
The DHCP Relay Agent makes it possible for DHCP broadcast messages to
be sent over routers that do not support forwarding of these types of messages. The
DHCP Relay Agent is therefore the routing protocol that enables DHCP clients to
obtain IP addresses from a DHCP server on a remote subnet, or which is not
located on the local subnet. If you have no configured DHCP Relay Agent, your
clients would only be able to obtain IP addresses from the DHCP server which is on
the same subnet.
If you are using the switches to insert DHCP Option 82 information and you
are also using as DHCP relay-agents (via ‘ip helper-address’), you’ll notice right
away that your Option 82 enabled DHCP requests are not being forwarded by your
switches.
Function name:
Config
Function description:
The switch to enable clients to obtain IP addresses from a DHCP server on a
remote subnet, you have to configure the DHCP Relay Agent on the subnet that
contains the remote clients, so that it can relay DHCP broadcast messages to your
DHCP server.
Fig. 3-13-1
Parameters description:
DHCP Relay State:
Publication date:March., 2011
46
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enable or disable the DHCP Relay function on the Switch, Default is
“Disable”.
DHCP Relay Lifetime:
Use to set the default lifetime for which a prefix delegated by this DHCP
local server is valid. This default is overridden by an interface-specific
lifetime. Default is “5” sec.
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 state:
Enables the system to insert the DHCP relay agent information option 82
in forwarded BOOT REQUEST messages to a DHCP server.
Default is “Disable” sec.
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy:
A DHCP relay agent may receive a message from another DHCP relay
agent that already contains relay information. If this behavior is not
suitable for your network, you can use the command “Replace, keep ,
Drop” to change it.
Default is “Keep” sec.
Server Port:
To evoke which port will enable the DHCP Relay Agent service.
Server IP:
To set the DHCP Server IP address.
Publication date: March., 2011
47
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. IP-MAC Binding
The IP network layer uses a four-byte address. The Ethernet link layer uses a
six-byte MAC address. Binding these two address types together allows the
transmission of data between the layers. The primary purpose of IP-MAC binding is
to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized users. Only the
authorized client can access the Switch’s port by checking the pair of IP-MAC
Addresses and port number with the pre-configured database. If an unauthorized
user tries to access an IP-MAC binding enabled port, the system will block the
access by dropping its packet.
Function name:
IP MAC Binding Configuration
Function description:
The switch has client and server two classes of IP-MAC Binding table. The
maximum number of IP-MAC binding client table is 512 entries. The maximum
number of IP-MAC Binding server table is 64 entries. The creation of authorized
users can be manually. The function is global, this means a user can enable or
disable the function for all ports on the switch.
Fig. 3-11
Parameters description:
State:
mode: It is used for the activation or de-activation of IP-MAC Binding.
Default is disable.
Binding Port: It are the ports which signs for IP-MAC Binding.
Binding List:
The maximum number of IP-MAC binding client table is 512 entries. The
maximum number of IP-MAC Binding server table is 64 entries.
Name:
A name is composed of any letter (A-Z, a-z) and digit (0-9) with maximal
8 characters.
Publication date:March., 2011
48
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAC:
Six-byte MAC Address: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
For example: 00-40-c7-00-00-01
IP:
Four-byte IP Address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
For example: 192.168.1.100
Port No:
Port no.: 1-24
Add:
Input MAC, IP, Port and VID, then click on <Add> to create a new entry
into the IP MAC Binding table
Edit:
The existed entry also can be modified after pressing <Edit> button.
Delete:
Select one of entry from the table, then click on <Delete> to delete this
entry.
Fig. 3-12
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5. Port Configuration
Four functions, including Port Status, Port Configuration, Simple Counter and
Detail Counter are contained in this function folder for port monitor and
management. Each of them will be described in detail orderly in the following
sections.
Port Configuration
Status
Configuration
Description
Simple Counter
Detail Counter
3-5-1.Port Status
The function Port Status gathers the information of all ports’ current status
and reports it by the order of port number, media, link status, port state, Auto-
Negotiation status, speed/duplex, Rx Pause and Tx Pause. An extra media type
information for the module ports 25 and 26 is also offered (See Fig. 3-11).
Fig. 3-13
Function name:
Port Status
Function Description:
Report the latest updated status of all ports in this switch. When any one of
the ports in the switch changes its parameter displayed in the page, it will be
automatically refreshed the port current status about every 5 seconds.
Parameter Description:
Publication date:March., 2011
50
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Port No:
Display the port number. The number is 1 – 26. Both port 25 and 26 are
optional modules.
Media:
Show the media type adopted in all ports. The Port 25 and Port 26 are
optional modules, which support either fiber or UTP media with either
Gigabit Ethernet (1000Mbps) or 10/100Mbps Fast Ethernet port. They
may have different media types and speed. Especially, fiber port has
comprehensive types of connector, distance, fiber mode and so on. The
switch describes the module ports with the following page.
Link:
Show that if the link on the port is active or not. If the link is connected to
a working-well device, the Link will show the link “Up”; otherwise, it will
show “Down”. This is determined by the hardware on both devices of the
connection.
No default value.
State:
Show that the communication function of the port is “Enabled” or
“Disabled”. When it is enabled, traffic can be transmitted and received via
this port. When it is disabled, no traffic can be transferred through this
port. Port State is configured by user.
Default: Enabled.
Auto Nego.:
Show the exchange mode of Ethernet MAC. There are two modes
supported in the switch. They are auto-negotiation mode “Enabled” and
forced mode “Disabled”. When in “Enabled” mode, this function will
automatically negotiate by hardware itself and exchange each other the
capability of speed and duplex mode with other site which is linked, and
comes out the best communication way. When in “Disabled” mode, both
parties must have the same setting of speed and duplex, otherwise, both
of them will not be linked. In this case, the link result is “Down”.
Default: Enabled
Speed / Duplex :
Display the speed and duplex of all port. There are three speeds 10Mbps,
100Mbps and 1000Mbps supported for TP media, and the duplex
supported is half duplex and full duplex. If the media is 1Gbps fiber, it is
1000Mbps supported only. The status of speed/duplex mode is
determined by 1) the negotiation of both local port and link partner in
“Auto Speed” mode or 2) user setting in “Force” mode. The local port has
to be preset its capability.
In port 1 – 24, they are supported Fast Ethernet with TP media only, so
the result will show 100M/Full or 100M/Half, 10M/Full and 10M/Half
duplex.
Publication date: March., 2011
51
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In port 25 and port 26, if the media is 1000Mbps with TP media, it will
show the combinations of 10/100M and Full/Half duplex, 1000Mbps and
Full duplex only. If the media is 1000Mbps with fiber media, it will show
only 1000M/Full duplex.
Default: None, depends on the result of the negotiation.
Rx Pause:
The way that the port adopts to process the PAUSE frame. If it shows
“on”, the port will care the PAUSE frame; otherwise, the port will ignore
the PAUSE frame.
Default: None
Tx Pause:
It decides that whether the port transmits the PAUSE frame or not. If it
shows “on”, the port will send PAUSE frame; otherwise, the port will not
send the PAUSE frame.
Default: None
Fig. 3-14
Parameter description of Port 25 and Port 26:
Connector Type:
Display the connector type, for instance, UTP, SC, ST, LC and so
on.
Fiber Type:
Display the fiber mode, for instance, Multi-Mode, Single-Mode.
Tx Central Wavelength:
Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength, for
instance, 850nm, 1310nm, 1550nm and so on.
Baud Rate:
Display the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported, for
instance, 10M, 100M, 1G and so on.
Vendor OUI:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display the Manufacturer's OUI code which is assigned by IEEE.
Vendor Name:
Display the company name of the module Manufacturer.
Vendor P/N:
Display the product name of the naming by module Manufacturer.
Vendor Rev (Revision):
Display the module revision.
Vendor SN (Serial Number):
Show the serial number assigned by the Manufacturer.
Date Code:
Show the date this module was made.
Temperature:
Show the current temperature of module.
Vcc:
Show the working DC voltage of module.
Mon1(Bias) mA:
Show the Bias current of module.
Mon2(TX PWR):
Show the transmit power of module.
Mon3(RX PWR):
Show the receiver power of module.
Publication date: March., 2011
53
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5-2. Port Configuration
Port Configuration is applied to change the setting of each port. In this configuration
function, you can set/reset the following functions. All of them are described in
detail below.
Function name:
Port Configuration
Function description:
It is used to set each port’s operation mode. The switch supports 3
parameters for each port. They are State, Speed/Duplex and Flow Control.
Fig. 3-15
Parameter description:
Publication date:March., 2011
54
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
State:
Set the communication capability of the port is Enabled or Disabled.
When enabled, traffic can be transmitted and received via this port.
When disabled, the port is blocked and no traffic can be transferred
through this port. Port State is configurable by the user. There are only
two states “Enable” and “Disable” able to choose. If you set a port’s state
“Disable”, then that port is prohibited to pass any traffic, even it looks
Link up.
Default: Enable.
Speed/Duplex:
Set the speed and duplex of the port. In speed, 10/100Mbps baud rate is
available for Fast Ethernet, Gigabit module in port 25, 26. If the media is
1Gbps fiber, it is always 1000Mbps and the duplex is full only. If the
media is TP, the Speed/Duplex is comprised of the combination of speed
mode, 10/100/1000Mbps, and duplex mode, full duplex and half duplex.
The following table summarized the function the media supports.
Media type
NWay
Speed
10/100M
10/100/1000M
1000M
Duplex
100M TP
1000M TP
1000M Fiber ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Full/Half
Full for all, Half for 10/100
Full
In Auto-negotiation mode, no default value. In Forced mode, default
value depends on your setting.
Flow Control:
There are two modes to choose in flow control, including Symmetric and
Asymmetric. If flow control is set Symmetric, both parties can send
PAUSE frame to the transmitting device(s) if the receiving port is too
busy to handle. When it is set Asymmetric, this will let the receiving port
care the PAUSE frame from transmitting device(s), but it doesn’t send
PAUSE frame. This is one-way flow control.
Default: Symmetric.
Power Saving:
The parameter will enable or disable to verify switches have the ability to
consider the length of any Ethernet cable connected for adjustment of
power usage accordingly. Shorter lengths require less power. link-down
mode removes power for each port that does not have a device attached.
Default: Disable.
Publication date: March., 2011
55
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5-3. Port Description
Port Description is applied to change the setting of each port. In this configuration
function, you can set the port description for specific application. All of them are
described in detail below.
Function name:
Port Description
Function description:
It is used to set each port’s description for network management purpose.
You can assign the friendly description per port to identity the Port purpose.
Fig. 3-15
Parameter description:
Port:
The port number on the Switch.
Description:
You can type the friendly description in the blank field. To set its port
description, max 47 characters
Publication date:March., 2011
56
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5-4. Simple Counter
The function of Simple Counter collects any information and provides the
counting about the traffic of the port, no matter the packet is good or bad.
In the Fig. 3-13, the window can show all ports’ counter information at the same
time. Each data field has 20-digit long. If the counting is overflow, the counter will be
reset and restart counting. The data is updated every time interval defined by the
user. The valid range is 3 to 10 seconds. The Refresh Interval is used to set the
update frequency. Default update time is 3 seconds.
Function name:
Simple Counter
Function description:
Display the summary counting of each port’s traffic, including Tx Byte, Rx Byte,
Tx Packet, Rx Packet, Tx Collision and Rx Error Packet.
Fig. 3-16
Parameters description:
Tx Byte:
Total transmitted bytes.
Rx Byte:
Total received bytes.
Tx Packet:
The counting number of the packet transmitted.
Rx Packet:
The counting number of the packet received.
Tx Collision:
Number of collisions transmitting frames experienced.
Rx Error Packet:
Number of bad packets received.
Publication date:March., 2011
57
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5-5. Detail Counter
The function of Detail Counter collects any information and provides the
counting about the traffic of the port, no matter the packet is good or bad.
In the Fig. 3-14, the window can show only one port counter information at
the same time. To see another port’s counter, you have to pull down the list of
Select, then you will see the figures displayed about the port you had chosen.
Each data field has 20-digit long. If the counting is overflow, the counter will be reset
and restart counting. The data is updated every time interval defined by the user.
The valid range is 3 to 10 seconds. The Refresh Interval is used to set the update
frequency. Default update time is 3 seconds.
Function name:
Detail Counter
Function description:
Display the detailed counting number of each port’s traffic. In the Fig. 3-14, the
window can show all counter information of each port at one time
Fig. 3-17
.
Parameter description:
Rx Packets:
The counting number of the packet received.
Rx Octets:
Total received bytes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rx Errors:
Number of bad packets received.
Rx Unicast Packets:
Show the counting number of the received unicast packet.
Rx Broadcast Packets:
Show the counting number of the received broadcast packet.
Rx Multicast Packets:
Show the counting number of the received multicast packet.
Rx Pause Packets:
Show the counting number of the received pause packet.
Tx Collisions:
Number of collisions transmitting frames experienced.
Tx Single Collision:
Number of frames transmitted that experienced exactly one collision.
Tx Multiple Collision:
Number of frames transmitted that experienced more than one collision.
Tx Drop Packets:
Number of frames dropped due to excessive collision, late collision, or
frame aging.
Tx Deferred Transmit:
Number of frames delayed to transmission due to the medium is busy.
Tx Late Collision:
Number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into
the transmission of a frame.
Tx Excessive Collision:
Number of frames that are not transmitted because the frame
experienced 16 transmission attempts.
Packets 64 Octets:
Number of 64-byte frames in good and bad packets received.
Packets 65-127 Octets:
Number of 65 ~ 127-byte frames in good and bad packets received.
Packets 128-255 Octets:
Number of 128 ~ 255-byte frames in good and bad packets received.
Packets 256-511 Octets:
Number of 256 ~ 511-byte frames in good and bad packets received.
Packets 512-1023 Octets:
Publication date: March., 2011
59
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Number of 512 ~ 1023-byte frames in good and bad packets received.
Packets 1024- 1522 Octets:
Number of 1024-1522-byte frames in good and bad packets received.
Tx Packets:
The counting number of the packet transmitted.
TX Octets:
Total transmitted bytes.
Tx Unicast Packets:
Show the counting number of the transmitted unicast packet.
Tx Broadcast Packets:
Show the counting number of the transmitted broadcast packet.
Tx Multicast Packets:
Show the counting number of the transmitted multicast packet.
Tx Pause Packets:
Show the counting number of the transmitted pause packet.
Rx FCS Errors:
Number of bad FSC packets received.
Rx Alignment Errors:
Number of Alignment errors packets received.
Rx Fragments:
Number of short frames (< 64 bytes) with invalid CRC.
Rx Jabbers:
Number of long frames(according tomax_length register) with invalid
CRC.
Rx Drop Packets:
Frames dropped due to the lack of receiving buffer.
Rx Undersize Packets:
Number of short frames (<64 Bytes) with valid CRC.
Rx Oversize Packets:
Number of long frames(according to max_length register) with valid CRC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6. Loop Detection
The loop detection is used to detect the presence of traffic. When switch
receives packet’s(looping detection frame) MAC address the same as oneself from
port, show Loop detection happens. The port will be locked when it received the
looping detection frames. If you want to resume the locked port, please find out the
looping path and take off the looping path, then select the resume the locked port
and click on “Resume” to turn on the locked ports
Function name:
Loop Detection
Function description:
Display whether switch open Loop detection.
Fig.3-18
Parameter description:
Port No:
Display the port number. The number is 1 – 24.
State – Disable / Enable:
When Port No is chosen, and enable port' s Loop detection, the port can
detect loop happens. When Port-No is chosen, enable port' s Loop
detection, and the port detects loop happen, port will be Locked. If Loop
did not happen, port maintains Unlocked. The default is Disable.
Current Status:
Display the port current status. The default is unlocked.
Locked Port - Resume:
When Port No is chosen, enable port' s Loop detection, and the port
detects loop happen, the port will be Locked. When choosing Resume,
port locked will be opened and turned into unlocked. If not choosing
Resume, Port maintains locked.
Action:
Option to enable the Loop-Detection function on the switch.
Publication date:March., 2011
61
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-7. SNMP Configuration
Any Network Management System (NMS) running the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) can manage the Managed devices equipped with
SNMP agent, provided that the Management Information Base (MIB) is installed
correctly on the managed devices. The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern
the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the
Object Identity (OID) of the management Information Base (MIB), described in the
form of SMI syntax. SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the request
issued by SNMP manager.
Basically, it is passive except issuing the trap information. The switch
supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent. If you set the field SNMP
“Enable”, SNMP agent will be started up. All supported MIB OIDs, including RMON
MIB, can be accessed via SNMP manager. If the field SNMP is set “Disable”, SNMP
agent will be de-activated, the related Community Name, Trap Host IP Address,
Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored.
Function name:
SNMP Configuration
Function description:
This function is used to configure SNMP settings, community name, trap host
and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP. A SNMP manager must pass the
authentication by identifying both community names, then it can access the MIB
information of the target device. So, both parties must have the same community
name. Once completing the setting, click <Apply> button, the setting takes effect.
Fig. 3-19 Community and trap host setting
Parameters description:
SNMP:
The term SNMP here is used for the activation or de-activation of SNMP.
Default is Enable.
Get/Set/Trap Community:
Publication date:March., 2011
62
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Community name is used as password for authenticating if the
requesting network management unit belongs to the same community
group. If they both don’t have the same community name, they don’t
belong to the same group. Hence, the requesting network management
unit can not access the device with different community name via SNMP
protocol; If they both have the same community name, they can talk each
other.
Community name is user-definable with a maximum length of 15
characters and is case sensitive. There is not allowed to put any blank in
the community name string. Any printable character is allowable.
The community name for each function works independently. Each
function has its own community name. Say, the community name for
GET only works for GET function and can’t be applied to other function
such as SET and Trap.
Default SNMP function : Enable
Default community name for GET: public
Default community name for SET: private
Default community name for Trap: public
Default Set function : Enable
Default trap host IP address: 0.0.0.0
Default port number :162
Trap:
In the switch, there are 6 trap hosts supported. Each of them has its own
community name and IP address; is user-definable. To set up a trap host
means to create a trap manager by assigning an IP address to host the
trap message. In other words, the trap host is a network management
unit with SNMP manager receiving the trap message from the managed
switch with SNMP agent issuing the trap message. 6 trap hosts can
prevent the important trap message from losing.
For each public trap, the switch supports the trap event Cold Start, Warm
Start, Link Down, Link Up and Authentication Failure Trap. They can be
enabled or disabled individually. When enabled, the corresponded trap
will actively send a trap message to the trap host when a trap happens. If
all public traps are disabled, no public trap message will be sent. As to
the Enterprise (no. 6) trap is classified as private trap, which are listed in
the Trap Alarm Configuration function folder.
Default for all public traps: Enable.
Publication date: March., 2011
63
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8. DHCP Boot
The DHCP Boot function is used to spread the request broadcast packet into
a bigger time frame to prevent the traffic congestion due to broadcast packets from
many network devices which may seek its NMS, boot server, DHCP server and
many connections predefined when the whole building or block lose the power and
then reboot and recover. At this moment, a bunch of switch or other network device
on the LAN will try its best to find the server to get the services or try to set up the
predefined links, they will issue many broadcast packets in the network.
The switch supports a random delay time for DHCP and boot delay for each
device. This suppresses the broadcast storm while all devices are at booting stage
in the same time. The maximum user-defined delay time is 30 sec. If DHCP
Broadcasting Suppression function is enabled, the delay time is set randomly,
ranging from 0 to 30 seconds, because the exactly delay time is computed by the
switch itself. The default is “Disable”.
Fig. 3-20
Publication date: Sep, 2009
64
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9. Multicast
The function, is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the
multicast packet to the member ports, and, in nature, avoids wasting the bandwidth
while IP multicast packets are running over the network. This is because a switch
that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping can not tell the multicast packet from
the broadcast packet, so it can only treat them all as the broadcast packet. Without
IGMP Snooping, the multicast packet forwarding function is plain and nothing is
different from broadcast packet.
A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query, report and
leave, a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router/Switch and IP
Multicast Host, can update the information of the Multicast table when a member
(port) joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address. With this function, once a
switch receives an IP multicast packet, it will forward the packet to the members
who joined in a specified IP multicast group before.
The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits
multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance.
3-9-1. IGMP Setting
Function name:
IGMP Setting
Function description:
IGMP is used to snoop the status of IP multicast groups and display its
associated information in both tagged VLAN and non-tagged VLAN networks.
Enabling IGMP with either passive or active mode, you can monitor the IGMP
snooping information, which contains the multicast member list with the
multicast groups, VID and member port.
Fig. 3-21
Publication date: Sep, 2009
65
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter description:
IGMP snooping mode selection:
The switch supports to enable IGMP snooping function
Enable:
Set “Enable” mode to enable IGMP Snooping function.
Default: un-enable.
Unregistered Multicast Flooding :
The switch supports to enable Unregistered Multicast Flooding function
Enable:
Set “Enable” mode to enable IGMP Snooping function.
Default: Enable
General Query Interval :
The general query interval is the amount of time in seconds between
IGMP General Query messages sent by the router (if the router is the
querier on this subnet).
Available value: 1-2000 sec
General Query Max Response Time :
The Maximum Response Time field is only used in general or group-
specific query messages. The Maximum Response Time is configured as
the value for the Query response interval setting
Available value: 1-10 sec
General Query Timeout :
The General Query Timeout field is the amount of time in seconds.
Available value: 1-30 sec
Specific Query Count :
To set Specific Query Count on Switch .
Available value: 1-10 times
Specific Query Max Response Time :
To set the specific Query Response Time field is used in specific or
group-specific query messages. The Specific Maximum Response Time
is configured as the value.
Available value: 1-10 sec
Specific Query Timeout :
The Specific Query Timeout field is the amount of time in seconds.
Available value: 1-30 sec
3-9-2. IGMP VLAN
Function name:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IGMP VLAN
Function description:
Specify the a static connection to a multicast router for the VLAN.
Fig. 3-22
Parameter description:
VID:
To Set specify the IGMP snooping VLAN ID for each multicast group.
Publication date: March., 2011
67
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9-3. Group Allow
Function name:
Group Allowed
Function description:
The Group Allowed function allows the IGMP Snooping to set up the IP
multicast table based on user’s specific conditions. IGMP report packets that
meet the items you set up will be joined or formed the multicast group.
Fig. 3-18
Parameter description:
IP Range:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid IP range,
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. In case that” Custom”
had been chosen, you can assigned effective IP range. The valid range
is 224.0.0.0~239.255.255.255.
VID:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid VLAN VID,
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. When you choose
“Custom”, you can fill in VID number. The valid VID range is 1~4094.
Port:
The switch supports two kinds of options for managed valid port range,
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. You can select the ports
that you would like them to be worked and restricted in the allowed group
configuration if ”Custom” had been chosen.
Add:
A new entry of allowed group configuration can be created after the
parameters as mentioned above had been setup and then press <Add>
button.
Edit:
The existed entry also can be modified after pressing <Edit> button.
Delete:
Remove the existed entry of allowed group configuration from the allowed group.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
68
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9-4. MVR Setting
Function name:
MVR Setting
Function description:
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) routes packets received in a multicast
source VLAN to one or more receive VLANs. Clients are in the receive VLANs
and the multicast server is in the source VLAN. Multicast routing has to be
disabled when MVR is enabled. Refer to the configuration guide at
Understanding Multicast VLAN Registration for more information on MVR..
Fig. 3-23
Parameter description:
Multicast VLAN Registration:
To Set the multicast VLAN registration function enable.
Multicast VLAN ID:
To Set the multicast VLAN ID.
Port No:
Display the port number. The number is 1 – 24.
Service Type:
To elect the service type which has three types include “None”, “ Client”
and “ Router”
Tagging:
To elect port tag-out or not.
Publication date: March., 2011
69
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9-5. Multicast Status
Function name:
Multicast Status
Function description:
The Multicast Status function allows to display the switch received multicast
traffic status. If the switch doesn’t receive any multicast traffic then it will
display the “No multicast entry !”
Fig. 3-24
Parameter description:
No:
To display current built-up multicast group entry index.
Group Address :
To display current built-up multicast Group Address
VID:
To display current built-up multicast VLAN ID .
Port Members:
To display current built-up multicast port members .
Previous Page:
To display previous page context.
Next Page:
To display next page context.
Refresh:
To Update multicast group membership.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9-6. RADIUS IGMP
Function name:
RADIUS IGMP
Function description:
The RADIUS IGMP function allows to some multicast applications, such as
IPTV and Internet Radio, may be of minimal interest to law enforcement
agencies, other multicast traffic may contain information important to an
investigation. The problem of not intercepting incoming multicast traffic affects
not only targets directly intercepted by IP address, but also targets intercepted
by login name, calling line identity, MAC address, and similar identities used
by such protocols as RADIUS and DHCP for authentication and dynamic IP
allocation.
A lawful interception solution that analyzes RADIUS and DHCP for target IP
addresses will likely fail to intercept incoming multicast traffic to the target.
Fig. 3-24
Parameter description:
Radius Server 1 and 2:
RADIUS server 1 and 2 IP address for authentication.
Default: 192.168.1.1
Port Number:
The port number to communicate with RADIUS server for the
authentication service. The valid value ranges 1-65535.
Default port number is 1812.
Secret Key:
Publication date: Sep, 2009
71
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The secret key between authentication server and authenticator. It is a
string with the length 1 – 31 characters. The character string may contain
upper case, lower case and 0-9. It is character sense. It is not allowed for
putting a blank between any two characters.
Default: Radius
To display current built-up multicast VLAN ID .
Response Timeout:
A timeout condition in the exchange between the authenticator and the
authentication server. The valid range: 1 –65535.
Default: 2 seconds
Number of Retry (1-10):
The maximum of number times that the authenticator will retransmit an
EAP Request to the supplicant before it times out the authentication
session. The valid range: 1 – 10.
Default: 1 time
Port Members:
To set the RADIUS IGMP multicast port members .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10. LLDP
The switch supports the LLDP. For current information on your switch model,
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) provides a standards-based method for
enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about
adjacent LLDP devices.
3-10-1 . LLDP State
Function name:
LLDP State
Function description:
The LLDP state function, you can set per port the LLDP configuration and the
detail parameters, the settings will take effect immediately.
Fig. 3-18-1 LLDP parameter
Parameter description:
Tx Interval： To changes the interval between consecutive transmissions of
LLDP advertisements on any given port. (Default: 30 secs)
Tx Hold
： The specifies the amount of time the receiving device holds a
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) packet before discarding
it. (Default: 4 times)
Tx Delay
Tx Reinit
: The specifies the delay between successive LLDP frame
transmissions initiated by value/status changes in the LLDP
local systems MIB. (Default: 2 secs)
:
The specifies the minimum time an LLDP port waits before
Publication date: Sep, 2009
73
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reinitializing LLDP transmission. (Default: 2 secs)
Notification
Interval:
The minimum interval for LLDP data change Notification fpr the
same neighbor. Refer to IEEE 802.1AB-2005 or later for more
information. (Default: 5 secs)
Mode
:
To enable or disable the LLDP mode per port. There are four
type includes Disable, Tx_Rx, Tx only and Rx only
Port Descr : To evoke the outbound LLDP advertisements, includes an
alphanumeric string describing the port.
Sys Name : To evoke the outbound LLDP advertisements, includes the
system’s assigned name
Sys Descr
:
To evoke outbound LLDP advertisements, includes an
alphanumeric string describing the full name and version
identification for the system’s hardware type, software version,
and networking application.
Sys Capa
:
To evoke outbound advertisements, includes a bitmask of
system capabilities (device functions) that are supported. Also
includes information on whether the capabilities are enabled.
Mgmt Addr : To evoke outbound advertisements, includes information on
management address. you can use to include a specific IP
address in the outbound LLDP advertisements for specific ports
Notification : Default: Disabled.
Enables or disables each port for sending notification to
configured SNMP trap receiver if an LLDP data change is
detected in an advertisement received on the port from LLDP
neighbor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10-2 . LLDP Entry
Function name:
LLDP Entry
Function description:
The LLDP Entry function allows a switch to display per port which build the
LLDP available entry. This information can be useful in tracking LLDP packets
back to a physical port.
Fig. 3-18-2 LLDP Entry
Parameter description:
Local port:
To display the switch local port.
Chassis ID:
To display the Chassis ID which connect to the switch and what the
neighbor Chassis ID.
Remote Port ID:
To display the Remote Port ID which connect to the switch and what the
neighbor’s remote port ID.
System name:
To display the system name which connect to the switch and which
device supports the LLDP
Port Description:
To display an alphanumeric string describing the port what the neighbor’s
port description.
System Capabilities:
To display an includes a bitmask of system capabilities (device functions)
Publication date: Sep, 2009
75
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that are supported. Also includes information on whether the capabilities
are enabled.
Management Address:
To display include a specific IP address in the outbound LLDP
advertisements for specific ports.
Auto - refresh:
Refresh the authenticator counters in the web UI automatically
Refresh:
Click on the <Refresh> to update the authenticator counters in the web
UI
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10-3 . LLDP Statistics
Function name:
LLDP Counter
Function description:
Display the detailed counting number of each port’s LLDP traffic
.
Fig. 3-18-3 LLDP statistics
Parameter description:
Neighbor Entries List Last Updated :
The time period which neighbor entries List were be updated .
Total Neighbors Entries Added:
The total neighbors entries added be received.
Total Neighbors Entries Deleted:
The total neighbors entries deleted be received.
Total Neighbors Entries Dropped:
The total neighbors entries dropped be received.
Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out:
The total neighbors entries aged out be received.
Local port:
Show the local port on the switch.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
Revision A8
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tx Frames:
The counting number of the frames transmitted.
Rx Frames:
The counting number of the frames transmitted.
Frames Discarded:
Show the number of frame discarded.
TLVs Discarded:
Show the number of TLVs discarded.
TLVs Unrecognized:
Show the number of TLVs unrecognized.
Age Outs:
Show the number of Age Outs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-11. VLAN
The switch supports Tag-based VLAN (802.1q) and Port-based VLAN
.
Support 256 active VLANs and VLAN ID 1~4094. VLAN configuration is used to
partition your LAN into small ones as your demand. Properly configuring it, you can
gain not only improving security and increasing performance but greatly reducing
VLAN management.
3-11-1. VLAN Mode
Function name:
VLAN Mode Setting
Function description:
The VLAN Mode Selection function includes two modes: Port-based and Tag-
based, you can choose one of them by pulling down list and pressing the
<Downward> arrow key. Then, click <Apply> button, the settings will take
effect immediately.
Fig. 3-25
Parameter description:
VLAN Mode:
Tag-based:
This is the default setting.
Tag-based VLAN identifies its member by VID. This is quite
different from port-based VLAN. If there are any more rules in
ingress filtering list or egress filtering list, the packet will be
screened with more filtering criteria to determine if it can be
forwarded. The switch supports supplement of 802.1q..
Each tag-based VLAN you built up must be assigned VLAN name
and VLAN ID. Valid VLAN ID is 1-4094. User can create total up to
256 Tag VLAN groups.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
79
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Port-based:
Port-based VLAN is defined by port. Any packet coming in or
outgoing from any one port of a port-based VLAN will be accepted.
No filtering criterion applies in port-based VLAN. The only criterion
is the physical port you connect to. For example, for a port-based
VLAN named PVLAN-1 contains port members Port 1&2&3&4. If
you are on the port 1, you can communicate with port 2&3&4. If you
are on the port 5, then you cannot talk to them. Each port-based
VLAN you built up must be assigned a group name. This switch can
support up to maximal 26 port-based VLAN groups.
Metro Mode:
The Metro Mode is a quick configuration VLAN environment
method on Port-based VLAN. It will create 22 or 23 Port-based
VLAN groups.
Symmetric Vlan:
This is a Ingress Rule (Rule 1, The Ingress Filtering Rule 1 is “forward
only packets with VID matching this port’s configured VID”.). For example,
if port 1 receives a tagged packet with VID=100 (VLAN name=VLAN100),
and if Symmetric-Vlan function is enabled, the switch will check if port 1
is a member of VLAN100. If yes, the received packet is forwarded;
otherwise, the received packet is dropped.
Note: If Symmetric is enabled and port 1, for example, receives an untagged
packet, the switch will apply the PVID of port 1 to tag this packet, the
packet then will be forwarded. But if the PVID of port 1 is not 100, the
packet will be dropped.
SVL:
While SVL is enable, all VLANs use the same filtering database storing
the membership information of the VLAN to learn or look up the
membership information of the VLAN. While SVL is disable, it means
learning mode is IVL. In this mode, different VLAN uses different filtering
database storing the membership information of the VLAN to learn or
look up the information of a VLAN member.
Double Tag:
Double-tag mode belongs to the tag-based mode, however, it would treat
all frames as the untagged ones, which means that tag with PVID will be
added into all packets. Then, these packets will be forwarded as Tag-
based VLAN. So, the incoming packets with tag will become the double-
tag ones.
Up-link Port:
This function is enabled only when metro mode is chosen in VLAN mode.
25:
Except Port 25, each port of the switch cannot transmit packets with
each other. Each port groups a VLAN with Port 25, thus, total 23
groups consisting of 2 members are formed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26:
Except Port 26, each port of the switch cannot transmit packets with
each other. Each port groups a VLAN with Port 26, thus, total 23
groups consisting of 2 members are formed.
25&26:
Except Port 25 and Port 26, each port of the switch cannot transmit
packets with each other. Each port groups a VLAN with Port 25
and Port 26, thus, total 22 groups consisting of 3 members are
formed.
Publication date: March., 2011
81
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-11-2. Tag-based Group
Function name:
Tag-based Group Configuration
Function description:
It shows the information of existed Tag-based VLAN Groups. You can also
easily create, edit and delete a Tag-based VLAN group by pressing <Add>,
<Edit> and <Delete> function buttons. User can add a new VLAN group by
inputting a new VLAN name and VLAN ID after pressing <Add> button.
Fig. 3-26
Parameter description:
No:
To display current built-up tag base VLAN entry index
VLAN Name:
The name defined by administrator is associated with a VLAN group.
Valid letters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “
length is 15 characters.
-
“ and “_” characters. The maximal
VID:
VLAN identifier. Each tag-based VLAN group has a unique VID. It
appears only in tag-based and Double-tag mode.
GVRP Propagation:
This is used to enable or disable if a port is a member of the new added
VLAN, “Enable” means it is a member of the VLAN. You can configure
an individual port to actively or passively participate in dynamic VLAN
propagation or to ignore dynamic VLAN (GVRP) operation.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
82
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Member:
This is used to enable or disable if a port is a member of the new added
VLAN, “Enable” means it is a member of the VLAN. Just tick the check
box beside the port x to enable it.
Utag:
This is used to enable or disable if a port is a utag member of the new
added VLAN, “Enable” means it is a utag member of the VLAN. Just tick
the check box beside the port x to enable it.
Action:
The mode here means the type of participant. There are two modes,
Active and NotInService, provided for the user’s choice.
Active:
It is Active Participant. In this mode, the switch participates
active in GARP protocol exchanges. The default setting is
Active.
NotInService:
It is NotInService. In this mode, the switch does not send or
reply any GARP messages. It just listens messages and
reacts for the received GVRP BPDU.
Fig. 3-27
Delete Group:
Just press the <Delete> button to remove the selected group entry from
the Tag-based group table.
Edit a group:
Just select a group entry and press the <Edit> button, then you can
modify a group’s description, member and untag settings.
Publication date: March., 2011
83
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-11-3. PVID
Function name:
PVID
Function description:
In PVID Setting, user can input VID number to each port. The range of VID
number is from 1 to 4094. User also can choose ingress filtering rule (Rule 2)
to each port. The Ingress Filtering Rule 2 is “drop untagged frame”. While Rule
2 is enabled, the port will discard all Untagged-frames.
Fig. 3-29
Parameter description:
Port 1-26:
Port number.
PVID:
This PVID range will be 1-4094. Before you set a number x as PVID, you
have to create a Tag-based VLAN with VID x. For example, if port x
receives an untagged packet, the switch will apply the PVID (assume as
VID y) of port x to tag this packet, the packet then will be forwarded as
the tagged packet with VID y.
Default Priority:
It bases on 802.1p QoS and affects untagged packets. When the packets
enter the switch, it would get the priority precedence according to your
Default Priority setting and map to 802.1p priority setting in QoS function.
For example, while you set Default Priority of port 2 with 2 and transmit
untagged packets to port 2, these packets will own priority 2 precedence
due to your default 802.1p Priority Mapping setting in QoS function and
be put into Queue 1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drop Untag:
Drop untagged frame. You can configure a given port to accept all frames
(Tagged and Untagged) or just receive tagged frame. If the former is the
case, then the packets with tagged or untagged will be processed. If the
later is the case, only the packets carrying VLAN tag will be processed,
the rest packets will be discarded.
Publication date: March., 2011
85
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-11-4. Port-based Group
Function name:
Port-based Group Configuration
Function description:
It shows the information of the existed Port-based VLAN Groups. You can
easily create, edit and delete a Port-based VLAN group by pressing <Add>,
<Edit> and <Delete> function buttons. User can add a new VLAN group by
inputting a new VLAN name.
Fig. 3-30
Parameter description:
VLAN Name:
The name defined by administrator is associated with a VLAN group.
Valid letters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “
length is 15 characters.
-
“ and “_” characters. The maximal
Member:
This is used to enable or disable if a port is a member of the new added
VLAN, “Enable” means it is a member of the VLAN. Just tick the check
box beside the port x to enable it.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
86
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add Group:
Create a new Port-based VLAN. Input the VLAN name and choose the
member by ticking the check box beside the port No., then, press the
<Apply> button to have the setting taken effect.
Fig. 3-31
Delete Group:
Just press the <Delete> button to remove the selected group entry from
the Port-based group table.
Fig. 3-32
Edit a group:
Just select a group entry and press the <Edit> button, then you can
modify a group‘s description and member set.
Publication date: March., 2011
87
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-11-5. Management VLAN
Function name:
Management VLAN
Function Description:
To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose.
Fig. 3-33
Parameter description:
State:
It works when the tag-based mode is chosen. When this function is
enabled, only the tagged packets with this VID can manage the switch.
VID:
Valid range 1~4094.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12. MAC Table
MAC Table Configuration gathers many functions, including MAC Table
Information, MAC Table Maintenance, Static and MAC Alias, which cannot be
categorized to some function type. They are described below.
Function name:
MAC Table Information
Function Description:
Display the static or dynamic learning MAC entry and the state for the selected
port.
Fig. 3-34
Parameter description:
Port:
Select the port you would like to inquire.
Search:
Set up the MAC entry you would like to inquire.
The default is ??-??-??-??-??-??
MAC:
Display the MAC address of one entry you selected from the searched
MAC entries table.
Alias:
Set up the Alias for the selected MAC entry.
Set Alias:
Save the Alias of MAC entry you set up.
Publication date: March., 2011
89
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search:
Find the entry that meets your setup.
Previous Page:
Move to the previous page.
Next Page:
Move to the next page.
Alias:
The Alias of the searched entry.
MAC Address:
The MAC address of the searched entry.
Port:
The port that exists in the searched MAC Entry.
VID:
VLAN Group that MAC Entry exists.
State:
Display the method that this MAC Entry is built. It may show “Dynamic
MAC” or “Static MAC”.
Function Name:
MAC Table Maintenance
Function Description:
This function can allow the user to set up the processing mechanism of MAC
Table. An idle MAC address exceeding MAC Address Age-out Time will be
removed from the MAC Table. The range of Age-out Time is 10-1000000
seconds, and the setup of this time will have no effect on static MAC
addresses.
In addition, the learning limit of MAC maintenance is able to limit the amount
of MAC that each port can learn.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-35
Parameter description:
Aging Time:
Delete a MAC address idling for a period of time from the MAC Table,
which will not affect static MAC address. Range of MAC Address Aging
Time is 10-1000000 seconds. The default Aging Time is 300 seconds.
Learning Limit:
To set up the maximum amount of MAC that each port can learn. Valid
value of learning limit for port 1~24 ranges from 0-8191. As to port
25~port 26, only the fixed value “8192” is assigned to these two ports
and user cannot configure this value.
Function Name:
Static Setting
Function Description:
The function of Static is used to configure MAC’s real manners inside of the
switch. Three kinds of manners including static, static with destination drop
and static with source drop are contained in this function .
As “static” is chosen, assign a MAC address to a specific port, all of the
switch’s traffics sent to this MAC address will be forwarded to this port.
As “static with destination drop” is chosen, the packet will be dropped if its DA
is equal to the value you set up. Due to this setting belongs to the global one,
so, it may affect all ports’ transmission of the packets.
As “static with source drop” is chosen, the packet will be dropped if its SA is
equal to the value you set up. Due to this setting belongs to the global one, so,
it may affect all ports’ transmission of the packets.
Publication date: March., 2011
91
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-36
Parameter description:
MAC:
It is a six-byte long Ethernet hardware address and usually expressed by
hex and separated by hyphens. For example,
00 – 40 - C7 - D6 – 00 - 01
VID:
VLAN identifier. This will be filled only when tagged VLAN is applied.
Valid range is 1 ~ 4094.
Forwarding Rule(Drop Policy):
Static:
A MAC address is assigned to a specific port, all of the switch’s
traffics sent to this MAC address will be forwarded to this port.
Static with Destination Drop:
While the DA of the incoming packets meets the value you set up,
these packets will be dropped.
Static with Source Drop:
While the SA of the incoming packets meets the value you set up,
these packets will be dropped.
Port :
Select the port No. you would like to do setup in the switch. It is 1 ~26.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
MAC Alias
Function description:
MAC Alias function is used to let you assign MAC address a plain English
name. This will help you tell which MAC address belongs to which user in the
illegal access report. At the initial time, it shows all pairs of the existed alias
name and MAC address.
There are three MAC alias functions in this function folder, including MAC Alias
Add, MAC Alias Edit and MAC Alias Delete. You can click <Create/Edit>
button to add/modify a new or an existed alias name for a specified MAC
address, or mark an existed entry to delete it. Alias name must be composed
of A-Z, a-z and 0-9 only and has a maximal length of 15 characters.
Fig. 3-37
Parameter description:
MAC Address:
It is a six-byte long Ethernet hardware address and usually expressed by
hex and separated by hyphens. For example,
00 – 40 - C7 - D6 – 00 - 02
Alias:
MAC alias name you assign.
Note: If there are too many MAC addresses learned in the table, we
recommend you inputting the MAC address and alias name directly.
Publication date: March., 2011
93
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Port Security
Function description:
Port Security function is used to let you assign the port authenticate with the
MAC address for security purpose.
Fig. 3-37-1
Parameter description:
Port:
Select the port you would like to inquire.
Function name:
Port static MAC
Function description:
Port Static MAC function is used to let you assign per port authenticate with
the static MAC address for security purpose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-37-1
Parameter description:
MAC Address:
It is a six-byte long Ethernet hardware address and usually expressed by
hex and separated by hyphens. For example,
00 – 40 - C7 - D6 – 00 - 02
VID:
VLAN Group ID that MAC Entry for the port member exists.
Publication date: March., 2011
95
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-13. GVRP Configuration
GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
(GARP), mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the group
membership information of the VLANs. The GVRP offers the function providing the
VLAN registration service through a GARP application. It makes use of GARP
Information Declaration (GID) to maintain the ports associated with their attribute
database and GARP Information Propagation (GIP) to communicate among
switches and end stations. With GID information and GIP, GVRP state machine
maintain the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and
propagate these information to other GVRP-aware devices to setup and update
their knowledge database, the set of VLANs associated with currently active
members, and through which ports these members can be reached.
In GVRP Configuration function folder, there are three functions supported,
including GVRP Config, GVRP Counter and GVRP Group explained below.
Fig. 3-38
Function name:
GVRP Config
Function description:
In the function of GVRP Config, it is used to configure each port’s GVRP
operation mode, in which there are seven parameters needed to be configured
described below.
Parameter description:
GVRP State Setting:
This function is simply to let you enable or disable GVRP function. You
can pull down the list and click the <Downward> arrow key to choose
“Enable” or “Disable”. Then, click the <Apply> button, the system will
take effect immediately.
Join Time:
Used to declare the Join Time in unit of centisecond. Valid time range:
20 –100 centisecond, Default: 20 centisecond.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
96
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leave Time:
Used to declare the Leave Time in unit of centisecond. Valid time range:
60 –300 centisecond, Default: 60 centisecond.
Leave All Time:
A time period for announcement that all registered device is going to be
de-registered. If someone still issues a new join, then a registration will
be kept in the switch. Valid range: 1000-5000 unit time, Default: 1000 unit
time.
Default Applicant Mode:
The mode here means the type of participant. There are two modes,
normal participant and non-participant, provided for the user’s choice.
Normal:
It is Normal Participant. In this mode, the switch participates
normally in GARP protocol exchanges. The default setting is
Normal.
Non-Participant:
It is Non-Participant. In this mode, the switch does not send or
reply any GARP messages. It just listens messages and
reacts for the received GVRP BPDU.
Default Registrar Mode:
The mode here means the type of Registrar. There are three types of
parameters for registrar administrative control value, normal registrar,
fixed registrar and forbidden registrar, provided for the user’s choice.
Normal:
It is Normal Registration. The Registrar responds normally to
incoming GARP messages. The default setting is Normal.
Fixed:
It is Registration Fixed. The Registrar ignores all GARP
messages, and all members remain in the registered (IN)
state.
Forbidden:
It is Registration Forbidden. The Registrar ignores all GARP
messages, and all members remain in the unregistered
(EMPTY) state.
Restricted Mode:
This function is used to restrict dynamic VLAN be created when this port
received GVRP PDU. There are two modes, disable and enable,
provided for the user’s choice.
Disabled:
In this mode, the switch dynamic VLAN will be created when
this port received GVRP PDU. The default setting is Normal.
Publication date: March., 2011
97
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enabled:
In this mode, the switch does not create dynamic VLAN when
this port received GVRP PDU. Except received dynamic
VLAN message of the GVRP PDU is an existed static VLAN in
the switch, this port will be added into the static VLAN
members dynamically.
Function name:
GVRP Counter
Function description:
All GVRP counters are mainly divided into Received and Transmitted two
categories to let you monitor the GVRP actions. Actually, they are GARP
packets.
Fig. 3-39
Parameter description:
Received:
Total GVRP Packets:
Total GVRP BPDU is received by the GVRP application.
Invalid GVRP Packets:
Number of invalid GARP BPDU is received by the GARP
application.
LeaveAll Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave All message is received by the
GARP application.
JoinEmpty Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Join Empty message is received by
the GARP application.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JoinIn Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Join In message is received by the
GARP application.
LeaveEmpty Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave Empty message is received by
the GARP application.
Empty Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Empty message is received by the
GARP application.
Transmitted:
Total GVRP Packets:
Total GARP BPDU is transmitted by the GVRP application.
Invalid GVRP Packets:
Number of invalid GARP BPDU is transmitted by the GVRP
application.
LeaveAll Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave All message is transmitted
by the GARP application.
JoinEmpty Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Join Empty message is transmitted by
the GARP application.
JoinIn Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Join In message is transmitted by the
GARP application.
LeaveEmpty Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave Empty message is transmitted
by the GARP application.
Empty Message Packets:
Number of GARP BPDU with Empty message is transmitted by the
GARP application.
Function name:
GVRP Group Information
Function description:
To show the dynamic group member and their information.
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-40
Parameter description:
Current Dynamic Group Number:
The number of GVRP group that are created currently.
VID:
VLAN identifier. When GVRP group creates, each dynamic VLAN group
owns its VID. Valid range is 1 ~ 4094.
Member Port:
Those are the members belonging to the same dynamic VLAN group.
Edit Administrative Control:
When you create GVRP group, you can use Administrative Control
function to change Applicant Mode and Registrar Mode of GVRP group
member.
Refresh:
Refresh function can help you to see current GVRP group status.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14. STP Configuration
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is a standardized method (IEEE 802.1D)
for avoiding loops in switched networks. When STP is enabled, ensure that only
one path is active between any two nodes on the network at a time. User can
enable Spanning Tree Protocol on switch’s web management and then set up other
advanced items. We recommend that you enable STP on all switches to ensure a
single active path on the network.
3-14-1. STP Status
Function name:
STP Status
Function description:
In the Spanning Tree Status, user can read 12 parameters to know STP
current status. The 12 parameters’ description is listed in the following table.
Fig. 3-41
Parameter description:
STP State:
Show the current STP Enabled / Disabled status. Default is “Disabled”.
Bridge ID:
Show switch’s bridge ID which stands for the MAC address of this switch.
Bridge Priority:
Show this switch’s current bridge priority setting. Default is 32768.
Designated Root:
Show root bridge ID of this network segment. If this switch is a root
Publication date: March., 2011
101
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
bridge, the “Designated Root” will show this switch’s bridge ID.
Designated Priority:
Show the current root bridge priority.
Root Port:
Show port number connected to root bridge with the lowest path cost.
Root Path Cost:
Show the path cost between the root port and the designated port of the
root bridge.
Current Max. Age:
Show the current root bridge maximum age time. Maximum age time is
used to monitor if STP topology needs to change. When a bridge does
not receive a hello message from root bridge until the maximum age time
is counted down to 0, the bridge will treat the root bridge malfunctioned
and issue a Topology Change Notification (TCN) BPDU to all other
bridges.
All bridges in the LAN will re-learn and determine which the root bridge is.
Maximum Age time is assigned by root bridge in unit of seconds. Default
is 20 seconds.
Current Forward Delay:
Show the current root bridge forward delay time. The value of Forward
Delay time is set by root. The Forward Delay time is defined as the time
spent from Listening state moved to Learning state or from Learning
state moved to Forwarding state of a port in bridge.
Hello Time:
Show the current hello time of the root bridge. Hello time is a time
interval specified by root bridge, used to request all other bridges
periodically sending hello message every “hello time” seconds to the
bridge attached to its designated port.
STP Topology Change Count:
STP Topology Change Count expresses the time spent in unit of seconds
since the beginning of the Spanning Tree Topology Change to the end of
the STP convergence. Once the STP change is converged, the Topology
Change count will be reset to 0. The figures showing in the screen may
not be the exact time it spent but very close to, because the time is
eclipsing.
Time Since Last Topology Change:
Time Since Last Topology Change is the accumulated time in unit of
seconds the STP has been since the last STP Topology Change was
made. When Topology Change is initiated again, this counter will be
reset to 0. And it will also count again once STP topology Change is
completed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14-2. STP Configuration
The STP, Spanning Tree Protocol, actually includes RSTP. In the Spanning
Tree Configuration, there are six parameters open for the user to configure as
user’s idea. Each parameter description is listed below.
Function name:
STP Configuration
Function description:
User can set the following Spanning Tree parameters to control STP function
enable/disable, select mode RSTP/STP and affect STP state machine
behavior to send BPDU in this switch. The default setting of Spanning Tree
Protocol is “Disable”.
Fig. 3-42
Parameter description:
Spanning Tree Protocol:
Set 802.1W Rapid STP function Enable / Disable. Default is “Disable”
Bridge Priority:
The lower the bridge priority is, the higher priority it has. Usually, the
bridge with the highest bridge priority is the root. If you want to have the
MSM-6226 as root bridge, you can set this value lower than that of
bridge in the LAN. The valid value is 0 ~ 61440. The default is 32768.
Hello Time:
Hello Time is used to determine the periodic time to send normal BPDU
from designated ports among bridges. It decides how long a bridge
should send this message to other bridge to tell I am alive. When the
MSM-6226 is the root bridge of the LAN, for example, all other bridges
Publication date: Sep, 2009
103
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will use the hello time assigned by this switch to communicate with each
other. The valid value is 1 ~ 10 in unit of second.
Default is 2 seconds.
Max. Age:
When the MSM-6226 is the root bridge, the whole LAN will apply this
figure set by this switch as their maximum age time. When a bridge
received a BPDU originated from the root bridge and if the message age
conveyed in the BPDU exceeds the Max. Age of the root bridge, the
bridge will treat the root bridge malfunctioned and issue a Topology
Change Notification (TCN) BPDU to all other bridges. All bridges in the
LAN will re-calculate and determine who the root bridge is. The valid
value of Max. Age is 6 ~ 40 seconds. Default is 20 seconds.
Forward Delay:
You can set the root bridge forward delay time. This figure is set by root
bridge only. The forward delay time is defined as the time spent from
Listening state moved to Learning state and also from Learning state
moved to Forwarding state of a port in bridge. The forward delay time
contains two states, Listening state to Learning state and Learning state
to Forwarding state. It assumes that forward delay time is 15 seconds,
then total forward delay time will be 30 seconds. This has much to do
with the STP convergent time which will be more than 30 seconds
because some other factors.
The valid value is 4 ~ 30 seconds, default is 15 seconds.
Force Version:
Two options are offered for the user’s choosing STP algorithm. One is
RSTP and the other is STP. If STP is chosen, RSTP will run as a legacy
STP. The switch supports RSTP (802.1w) which is backward compatible
with STP (802.1d).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14-3. STP Port Configuration
Function name:
STP Port Setting
Function description:
In the STP Port Setting, one item selection and five parameters settings are
offered for user’s setup. User can disable and enable each port by selecting
each Port Status item. User also can set “Path Cost” and “Priority” of each port
by filling in the desired value and set “Admin Edge Port” and “Admin Point To
Point” by selecting the desired item.
Fig. 3-43
Parameter description:
Port Status:
It displays the current state of a port. We cannot manually set it because
it displays the status only. There are three possible states. ( according to
802.1w specification)
ꢀDISCARDING state indicates that this port can neither forward packets
nor contribute learning knowledge.
Notice: Three other states (Disable state, BLOCKING state and LISTENING
state) defined in the 802.1d specification are now all represented as
DISCARDING state.
ꢀLEARNING state indicates this port can now contribute its learning
knowledge but cannot forward packets still.
ꢀFORWARDING state indicates this port can both contribute its learning
knowledge and forward packets normally.
Path Cost Status:
It is the contribution value of the path through this port to Root Bridge.
STP algorithm determines a best path to Root Bridge by calculating the
sum of path cost contributed by all ports on this path. A port with a
smaller path cost value would become the Root Port more possibly.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
105
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configured Path Cost:
The range is 0 – 200,000,000. In the switch, if path cost is set to be zero,
the STP will get the recommended value resulted from auto-negotiation
of the link accordingly and display this value in the field of Path Cost
Status. Otherwise, it may show the value that the administrator set up in
Configured Path Cost and Path Cost Status.
802.1w RSTP recommended value: (Valid range: 1 – 200,000,000)
10 Mbps : 2,000,000
100 Mbps : 200,000
1 Gbps : 20,000
Default: 0
Priority:
Priority here means Port Priority. Port Priority and Port Number are
mixed to form the Port ID. Port IDs are often compared in order to
determine which port of a bridge would become the Root Port. The range
is 0 – 240.
Default is 128.
Admin Edge Port:
If user selects “Yes”, this port will be an edge port. An Edge Port is a port
connected to a device that knows nothing about STP or RSTP. Usually,
the connected device is an end station. Edge Ports will immediately
transit to forwarding state and skip the listening and learning state
because the edge ports cannot create bridging loops in the network. This
will expedite the convergence. When the link on the edge port toggles,
the STP topology keeps unchanged. Unlike the designate port or root
port though, an edge port will transit to a normal spanning-tree port
immediately if it receives a BPDU.
Default: No
Admin Point To Point:
We say a port is a point-to-point link, from RSTP’s view, if it is in full-
duplex mode but is shared link if it is in half-duplex mode. RSTP fast
convergence can only happen on point-to-point links and on edge ports.
This can expedite the convergence because this will have the port fast
transited to forwarding state.
There are three parameters, Auto, True and False, used to configure the
type of the point-to-point link. If configure this parameter to be Auto, it
means RSTP will use the duplex mode resulted from the auto-negotiation.
In today’s switched networks, most links are running in full-duplex mode.
For sure, the result may be half-duplex, in this case, the port will not fast
transit to Forwarding state. If it is set as True, the port is treated as point-
to-point link by RSTP and unconditionally transited to Forwarding state. If
it is set as False, fast transition to Forwarding state will not happen on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
this port.
Default: Auto
M Check:
Migration Check. It forces the port sending out an RSTP BPDU instead
of a legacy STP BPDU at the next transmission. The only benefit of this
operation is to make the port quickly get back to act as an RSTP port.
Click <M Check> button to send a RSTP BPDU from the port you
specified.
Publication date: March., 2011
107
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-15. MSTP Configuration
The implementation of MSTP is according to IEEE 802.1Q 2005 Clause
13 – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. MSTP allows frames assigned to different
VLANs to follow separate paths, each based on an independent Multiple Spanning
Tree Instance (MSTI), within Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) Regions composed of
LANs and or MST Bridges. Proper configuration of MSTP in an 802.1Q VLAN
environment can ensure a loop-free data path for a group of vlans within an MSTI.
Redundant path and load balancing in vlan environment is also achieved via this
feature.A spanning tree instance called CIST(Common and Internal Spanning Tree)
always exists . Up to 64 more spanning tree instances (MSTIs) can be provisioned.
3-15-1 Status
Function name:
MSTP State
Function description:
To enable or disable MSTP. And to select a version of Spanning Tree protocol
which MSTP should operate on.
Fig. 3-43.1
Parameter description:
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol:
Disabled / Enabled
Force Version:
STP / RSTP / MSTP
Publication date: Sep, 2009
108
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-15-2 Region Config
Function name:
MSTP Region Config
Function description:
To configure the basic identification of a MSTP bridge. Bridges participating in
a common MST region must have the same Region Name and Revision Level.
Fig. 3-43.2
Parameter description:
Region Name:
0-32 characters.(A variable length text string encoded within a fixed field
of 32 octets , conforming to RFC 2271’s definition of SnmpAdminString.)
Revision Level:
0-65535
Publication date: Sep, 2009
109
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-15-3 Instance View
Function name:
MSTP Instance Config
Function description:
Providing an MST instance table which include information(vlan membership
of a MSTI ) of all spanning instances provisioned in the particular MST region
which the bridge belongs to. Through this table, additional MSTP configuration
data can be applied and MSTP status can be retrieved.
Fig. 3-43.3
Parameter description:
Instance ID:
Every spanning tree instance need to have a unique instance ID within
0~4095. Instance 0 (CIST) always exists and can not be deleted.
Additional spanning instances (MSTIs) can be added or deleted. At least
one vlan must be provisioned for an MSTI to declare the need for the
MSTI to be existent.
Corresponding Vlans:
0-4095.
Multiple vlans can belong to an MSTI. All vlans that are not provisioned
through this will be automatically assigned to Instance 0(CIST).
Edit MSTI / Vlan: Fig. 3-43.4
To add an MSTI and provide its vlan members or modify vlan members
for a specific MSTI.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
110
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Del MSTI:
To delete an MSTI.
Del All MSTI:
Deleting all provisioned MSTIs at a time.
Instance Configuration: Fig. 3-43.5
To provision spanning tree performance parameters per instance.
Port Config: Fig. 3-43.4
To provision spanning tree performance parameters per instance per port.
Instance Status: Fig. 3-43.5
To show the status report of a particular spanning tree instance.
Port Status: Fig. 3-43.5
To show the status report of all ports regarding a specific spanning tree
instance.
Fig. 3-43.4 Edit MSTI / Vlan
Parameter description:
Vlan Mapping:
VID STRING
VID STRING Example:
2.5-7.100-200.301.303.1000-1500 (Valid VID Range:1-4094)
Publication date: March., 2011
111
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-43.5 Instance Config
Parameter description:
Priority: The priority parameter used in the CIST(Common and Internal
Spanning Tree) connection.
0 / 4096 / 8192 / 12288 / 16384 / 20480 / 24576 / 28672 / 32768 / 36864
/ 40960 / 45056 / 49152 / 53248 / 57344 / 61440
MAX. Age:
6-40sec. The same definition as in the RSTP protocol.
Forward Delay:
4-30sec. The same definition as in the RSTP protocol.
MAX. Hops:
6-40sec. It’s a new parameter for the multiple spanning tree protocol. It is
used in the internal spanning tree instances. “CIST Remaining Hops” or
“MSTI Remaining Hops” in the Spanning tree protocol message would
decreased by one when the message is propagated to the neighboring
bridge. If the Remaining Hops in a message is zero, the message (BPDU)
would be regarded as invalid. Max Hops is used to specify the initial
value of the Remaining Hops for Regional Root Bridge (Either CIST
Regional Root or MSTI Regional Root)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-43.6 Port Config
Parameter description:
Port:
1-24
Path Cost:
1 – 200,000,000
The same definition as in the RSTP specification. But in MSTP, this
parameter can be respectively applied to ports of CIST and ports of any
MSTI.
Priority:
0 / 16 / 32 / 48 / 64 / 80 / 96 / 112 / 128 / 144 / 160 / 176 / 192 / 208 / 224
/ 240
The same definition as in the RSTP specification. But in MSTP, this
parameter can be respectively applied to ports of CIST and ports of any
MSTI.
Hello Time:
1 / 2
In contrast with RSTP, Hello Time in MSTP is a per port setting for the
CIST.
Admin Edge:
Yes / No
The same definition as in the RSTP specification for the CIST ports.
Admin P2P:
Auto / True / False
The same definition as in the RSTP specification for the CIST ports.
Publication date: March., 2011
113
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restricted Role:
Yes / No
If “Yes” causes the Port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or
any MSTI, even it has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a Port
will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been
selected. This parameter is “No” by default. If set, it can cause lack of
spanning tree connectivity. It is set by a network administrator to prevent
bridges external to a core region of the network influencing the spanning
tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are not under the
full control of the administrator.
Restricted TCN:
Yes / No
If “Yes” causes the Port not to propagate received topology change
notifications and topology changes to other Ports. This parameter is “No”
by default. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after
changes in a spanning trees active topology as a result of persistent
incorrectly learned station location information. It is set by a network
administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network,
causing address flushing in that region, possibly because those bridges
are not under the full control of the administrator. or the status of MAC
operation for the attached LANs transitions frequently.
Mcheck:
The same definition as in the RSTP specification for the CIST ports.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-43.7 Instance Status
Parameter description:
MSTP State:
MSTP protocol is Enable or Disable.
Force Version:
It shows the current spanning tree protocol version configured.
Bridge Max Age:
It shows the Max Age setting of the bridge itself.
Bridge Forward Delay:
It shows the Forward Delay setting of the bridge itself.
Bridge Max Hops:
It shows the Max Hops setting of the bridge itself.
Instance Priority:
Spanning tree priority value for a specific tree instance(CIST or MSTI)
Bridge Mac Address:
The Mac Address of the bridge itself.
Publication date: March., 2011
115
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIST ROOT PRIORITY:
Spanning tree priority value of the CIST root bridge
CIST ROOT MAC:
Mac Address of the CIST root bridge
CIST EXTERNAL ROOT PATH COST:
Root path cost value from the point of view of the bridge’s MST region.
CIST ROOT PORT ID:
The port ID of the bridge’s root port. In MSTP, peer port of a root port
may reside in defferent MST region or in the same MST region.The first
case indicates that the root port’s owner is the CIST regional root bridge.
CIST REGIONAL ROOT PRIORITY:
Spanning tree priority value of the CIST regional root bridge.Note that
CIST Regional Root bridge is different from CIST Root bridge.One
exception is that when a bridge belonging to an MST region happens to
be the root bridge of the CST(Common Spanning Tree). An MST Region
in the CST can be regarded as a common RSTP bridge.The IST(Internal
Spanning Tree) and MSTIs are transparent to bridges outside this region.
CIST REGIONAL ROOT MAC:
Mac Address of the CIST regional root bridge.
CIST INTERNAL ROOT PATH COST:
Root path cost value from the point of view of the bridges inside the IST.
CIST CURRENT MAX AGE:
Max Age of the CIST Root bridge.
CIST CURRENT FORWARD DELAY:
Forward Delay of the CIST Root bridge.
TIME SINCE LAST TOPOLOGY CHANGE(SECs):
Time Since Last Topology Change is the elapsed time in unit of seconds
for a bunch of “Topology Change and(or) Topology Change Notification
receiving” to occur. When new series of Topology Changes occur again,
this counter will be reset to 0.
TOPOLOGY CHANGE COUNT(SECs):
The per spanning tree instanceTopology Change Count expresses the
time spent in unit of seconds since the beginning of the Spanning Tree
Topology Change to the end of the STP convergence. Once there is no
topology change occurring and no more topology change notification
received, the Topology Change count will be reset to 0.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-43.8 Port Status
Parameter description:
Port No:
1-24
Status:
The forwarding status.Same definition as of the RSTP specification
Possible values are “FORWARDING” , “LEARNING” , “DISCARDING”
Status:
The role that a port plays in the spanning tree topology. Possible values
are “dsbl”(disable port) , ”alt”(alternate port) , “bkup”(backup port) ,
“ROOT”(root port) , “DSGN”(designated port) , “MSTR”(master port). The
last 3 are possible port roles for a port to transit to FORWARDING state
Path Cost:
Display currently resolved port path cost value for each port in a
particular spanning tree instance.
Priority:
Display port priority value for each port in a particular spanning tree
instance.
Hello:
per port Hello Time display. It takes the following form:
Current Hello Time/Hello Time Setting
Oper. Edge:
Whether or not a port is an Edge Port in reality.
Oper. P2P:
Whether or not a port is a Point-to-Point Port in reality.
Restricted Role:
Same as mentioned in “Port Config”
Restricted Tcn:
Same as mentioned in “Port Config”
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16. Trunking Configuration
The Port Trunking Configuration is used to configure the settings of Link
Aggregation. You can bundle more than one port with the same speed, full duplex
and the same MAC to be a single logical port, thus the logical port aggregates the
bandwidth of these ports. This means you can apply your current Ethernet
equipments to build the bandwidth aggregation. For example, if there are three
Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port, then this logical port has bandwidth
three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port has.
The switch supports two kinds of port trunking methods:
LACP:
Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (according to IEEE
802.3ad specification) as their trunking method can choose their unique
LACP GroupID (1~3) to form a logic “trunked port”. The benefit of using
LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it
becomes a ready member of a “trunk group” (also called aggregator).
LACP is safer than the other trunking method - static trunk.
The switch LACP does not support the followings:
Link Aggregation across switches
Aggregation with non-IEEE 802.3 MAC link
Operating in half-duplex mode
Aggregate the ports with different data rates
Static Trunk:
Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique
Static GroupID (also 1~3, this Static groupID can be the same with
another LACP groupID) to form a logic “trunked port”. The benefit of
using Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a
member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port. This
is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group
may not know that they should be aggregate together to form a “logic
trunked port”. Using Static Trunk on both end of a link is strongly
recommended. Please also note that low speed links will stay in “not
ready” state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links.
As to system restrictions about the port aggregation function on the switch,
In the management point of view, the switch supports maximum 3 trunk groups for
LACP and additional 3 trunk groups for Static Trunk. But in the system capability
view, only 3 “real trunked” groups are supported. An LACP trunk group with more
than one ready member-ports is a “real trunked” group. An LACP trunk group with
only one or less than one ready member-ports is not a “real trunked” group. Any
Static trunk group is a “real trunked” group.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
118
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Per Trunking Group supports a maximum of 4 ready member-ports. Please
note that some decisions will automatically be made by the system while you are
configuring your trunking ports. Trunk Setting Rules are listed below:
Rule1: Maximum 3 groups are allowed
Rule 2: The members of each group cannot exceed more than 4 ports
Rule 3: Group 1 and 2 cannot exist member 25 and 26 port
Rule 4: Group 3 cannot exist member from 1 to 24 port
Function name:
Port Setting/Status
Function description:
Port setting/status is used to configure the trunk property of each and every
port in the switch system.
Fig.3- 44
Parameter description:
Method:
This determines the method a port uses to aggregate with other ports.
None:
A port does not want to aggregate with any other port should
choose this default setting.
Publication date: March., 2011
119
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LACP:
A port use LACP as its trunk method to get aggregated with other
ports also using LACP.
Static:
A port use Static Trunk as its trunk method to get aggregated with
other ports also using Static Trunk.
Group:
Ports choosing the same trunking method other than “None” must be
assigned a unique Group number (i.e. Group ID, valid value is from 1 to
8) in order to declare that they wish to aggregate with each other.
Active LACP:
This field is only referenced when a port’s trunking method is LACP.
Active:
An Active LACP port begins to send LACPDU to its link partner right
after the LACP protocol entity started to take control of this port.
Passive:
A Passive LACP port will not actively send LACPDU out before it
receives an LACPDU from its link partner.
Aggtr:
Aggtr is an abbreviation of “aggregator”. Every port is also an aggregator,
and its own aggregator ID is the same as its own Port No. We can regard
an aggregator as a representative of a trunking group. Ports with same
Group ID and using same trunking method will have the opportunity to
aggregate to a particular aggregator port. This aggregator port is usually
the port with the smallest Port No. within the trunking group.
Status:
This field represents the trunking status of a port which uses a trunking
method other than “None”. It also represents the management link status
of a port which uses the “None” trunking method. “---“ means “not ready”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Aggregator View
Function description:
To display the current port trunking information from the aggregator point of
view.
Fig.3-45
Parameter description:
Aggregator:
It shows the aggregator ID (from 1 to 26) of every port. In fact, every port
is also an aggregator, and its own aggregator ID is the same as its own
Port No..
Method:
Show the method a port uses to aggregate with other ports.
Member Ports:
Show all member ports of an aggregator (port).
Ready Ports:
Show only the ready member ports within an aggregator (port).
Publication date: March., 2011
121
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
LACP Detail (LACP Aggregator Detailed Information)
Function description:
Show the detailed information of the LACP trunking group.
Fig. 3-46
Parameter description:
Actor:
The switch you are watching on.
Partner:
The peer system from this aggregator’s view.
System Priority:
Show the System Priority part of a system ID.
MAC Address:
Show the MAC Address part of a system ID.
Port:
Show the port number part of an LACP port ID.
Key:
Show the key value of the aggregator. The key value is determined by
the LACP protocol entity and can’t be set through management.
Trunk Status:
Show the trunk status of a single member port.”---“ means “not ready”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
LACP System Configuration
Function description:
It is used to set the priority part of the LACP system ID. LACP will only
aggregate together the ports whose peer link partners are all on a single
system. Each system supports LACP will be assigned a globally unique
System Identifier for this purpose. A system ID is a 64-bit field comprising a
48-bit MAC Address and 16-bit priority value.
Fig.3-47
Parameter description:
System Priority:
The System Priority can be set by the user. Its range is from 1 to 65535.
Default: 32768.
LACP Hash Method:
DA+SA, DA and SA are three Hash methods offered for the Link
Aggregation of the switch. Packets will decide the path to transmit
according to the mode of Hash you choose.
Default: DA and SA
Publication date: March., 2011
123
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-17. 802.1x Configuration
802.1x port-based network access control provides a method to restrict users
to access network resources via authenticating user’s information. This restricts
users from gaining access to the network resources through a 802.1x-enabled port
without authentication. If a user wishes to touch the network through a port under
802.1x control, he (she) must firstly input his (her) account name for authentication
and waits for gaining authorization before sending or receiving any packets from a
802.1x-enabled port.
Before the devices or end stations can access the network resources through
the ports under 802.1x control, the devices or end stations connected to a controlled
port send the authentication request to the authenticator, the authenticator pass the
request to the authentication server to authenticate and verify, and the server tell
the authenticator if the request get the grant of authorization for the ports.
According to IEEE802.1x, there are three components implemented. They
are Authenticator, Supplicant and Authentication server shown in Fig. 3-41.
Supplicant:
It is an entity being authenticated by an authenticator. It is used to
communicate with the Authenticator PAE (Port Access Entity) by
exchanging the authentication message when the Authenticator PAE
request to it.
Authenticator:
An entity facilitates the authentication of the supplicant entity. It controls
the state of the port, authorized or unauthorized, according to the result
of authentication message exchanged between it and a supplicant PAE.
The authenticator may request the supplicant to re-authenticate itself at a
configured time period. Once start re-authenticating the supplicant, the
controlled port keeps in the authorized state until re-authentication fails.
A port acting as an authenticator is thought to be two logical ports, a
controlled port and an uncontrolled port. A controlled port can only pass
the packets when the authenticator PAE is authorized, and otherwise, an
uncontrolled port will unconditionally pass the packets with PAE group
MAC address, which has the value of 01-80-c2-00-00-03 and will not be
forwarded by MAC bridge, at any time.
Authentication server:
A device provides authentication service, through EAP, to an
authenticator by using authentication credentials supplied by the
supplicant to determine if the supplicant is authorized to access the
network resource.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
124
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The overview of operation flow for the Fig. 3-41 is quite simple. When
Supplicant PAE issues a request to Authenticator PAE, Authenticator and
Supplicant exchanges authentication message. Then, Authenticator
passes the request to RADIUS server to verify. Finally, RADIUS server
replies if the request is granted or denied.
While in the authentication process, the message packets, encapsulated
by Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL), are exchanged
between an authenticator PAE and a supplicant PAE. The Authenticator
exchanges the message to authentication server using EAP
encapsulation. Before successfully authenticating, the supplicant can
only touch the authenticator to perform authentication message
exchange or access the network from the uncontrolled port.
Supplicant’s
System
Authentication
Authenticator’s System
Server’s System
Services Offered
by Authenticator
(e.g Bridge Relay)
Supplicant
PAE
Authenticator
PAE
Authentication
Server
Controlled port
Uncontrolled port
Port Authorize
MAC Enable
LAN
Fig. 3-48
In the Fig. 3-48, this is the typical configuration, a single supplicant, an
authenticator and an authentication server. B and C is in the internal network, D is
Authentication server running RADIUS, switch at the central location acts
Authenticator connecting to PC A and A is a PC outside the controlled port, running
Supplicant PAE. In this case, PC A wants to access the services on device B and C,
first, it must exchange the authentication message with the authenticator on the port
it connected via EAPOL packet. The authenticator transfers the supplicant’s
credentials to Authentication server for verification. If success, the authentication
server will notice the authenticator the grant. PC A, then, is allowed to access B and
C via the switch. If there are two switches directly connected together instead of
single one, for the link connecting two switches, it may have to act two port roles at
the end of the link: authenticator and supplicant, because the traffic is bi-directional.
Publication date: March., 2011
125
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Authentication server
C
Fig. 3-49
Authenticator
B
Supplicant A
The Fig. 3-49 shows the procedure of 802.1x authentication. There are steps
for the login based on 802.1x port access control management. The protocol used
in the right side is EAPOL and the left side is EAP.
1.
At the initial stage, the supplicant A is unauthenticated and a port
on switch acting as an authenticator is in unauthorized state. So the
access is blocked in this stage.
2.
Initiating a session. Either authenticator or supplicant can initiate
the message exchange. If supplicant initiates the process, it sends
EAPOL-start packet to the authenticator PAE and authenticator will
immediately respond EAP-Request/Identity packet.
3.
4.
5.
The authenticator always periodically sends EAP-Request/Identity
to the supplicant for requesting the identity it wants to be
authenticated.
If the authenticator doesn’t send EAP-Request/Identity, the
supplicant will initiate EAPOL-Start the process by sending to the
authenticator.
And next, the Supplicant replies an EAP-Response/Identity to the
authenticator. The authenticator will embed the user ID into Radius-
Access-Request command and send it to the authentication server
for confirming its identity.
6.
7.
After receiving the Radius-Access-Request, the authentication
server sends Radius-Access-Challenge to the supplicant for asking
for inputting user password via the authenticator PAE.
The supplicant will convert user password into the credential
information, perhaps, in MD5 format and replies an EAP-Response
with this credential information as well as the specified
authentication algorithm (MD5 or OTP) to Authentication server via
the authenticator PAE. As per the value of the type field in message
PDU, the authentication server knows which algorithm should be
applied to authenticate the credential information, EAP-MD5
(Message Digest 5) or EAP-OTP (One Time Password) or other
else algorithm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.
9.
If user ID and password is correct, the authentication server will
send a Radius-Access-Accept to the authenticator. If not correct,
the authentication server will send a Radius-Access-Reject.
When the authenticator PAE receives a Radius-Access-Accept, it
will send an EAP-Success to the supplicant. At this time, the
supplicant is authorized and the port connected to the supplicant
and under 802.1x control is in the authorized state. The supplicant
and other devices connected to this port can access the network. If
the authenticator receives a Radius-Access-Reject, it will send an
EAP-Failure to the supplicant. This means the supplicant is failed to
authenticate. The port it connected is in the unauthorized state, the
supplicant and the devices connected to this port won’t be allowed
to access the network.
10. When the supplicant issue an EAP-Logoff message to
Authentication server, the port you are using is set to be
unauthorized.
Bridge
LAN
Radius Server
PC
Port connect
Access blocked
EAPOL-Start
EAPOL
EAP
Radius
Authenticator
EAP-Request/Identity
EAP-Response/Identity
Radius-Access-Request
Radius-Access-Challenge
EAP-Request
Radius-Access-Request
Radius-Access-Accept
EAP-Response (cred)
EAP-Success
EAP-Failure
EAP-Logoff
Access allowed
Fig. 3-50
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Only MultiHost 802.1X is the type of authentication supported in the switch.
In this mode, for the devices connected to this port, once a supplicant is authorized,
the devices connected to this port can access the network resource through this
port.
802.1x Port-based Network Access Control function supported by the switch
is little bit complex, for it just support basic Multihost mode, which can distinguish
the device’s MAC address and its VID. The following table is the summary of the
combination of the authentication status and the port status versus the status of port
mode, set in 802.1x Port mode, port control state, set in 802.1x port setting. Here
Entry Authorized means MAC entry is authorized.
Port Mode
Port Control
Don’t Care
Auto
Auto
ForceUnauthorized Don’t Care
ForceAuthorized Don’t Care
Authentication
Port Status
Disable
Don’t Care
Successful
Failure
Port Uncontrolled
Port Authorized
Port Unauthorized
Port Unauthorized
Port Authorized
Multihost
Multihost
Multihost
Multihost
Table 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
802.1x State Setting
Function description:
This function is used to configure the global parameters for RADIUS
authentication in 802.1x port security application.
Fig. 3-51
Parameter description:
Radius Server:
RADIUS server IP address for authentication.
Default: 192.168.1.1
Port Number:
The port number to communicate with RADIUS server for the
authentication service. The valid value ranges 1-65535.
Default port number is 1812.
Secret Key:
The secret key between authentication server and authenticator. It is a
string with the length 1 – 31 characters. The character string may contain
upper case, lower case and 0-9. It is character sense. It is not allowed for
putting a blank between any two characters.
Default: Radius
Publication date: March., 2011
129
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
802.1x Mode Setting
Function description:
Set the operation mode of 802.1X for each port. In this device, it supports
Normal and Advanced 802.1X mode.
Fig. 3-52
Parameter description:
Port Number:
Indicate which port is selected to configure the 802.1x operation mode.
802.1x Mode:
802.1x operation mode. There are two options, including Disable and
Multi-host mode. Default is Disable.
ꢀ
Disable
It will have the chosen port acting as a plain port, that is no 802.1x
port access control works on the port.
ꢀ
Normal
It will have the chosen port acting as a plain port, that is normal 802.1x
port access control works on the port.
ꢀ
Advanced 802.1X
In Advanced 802.1X mode, for the devices connected to this port,
once a supplicant is authorized, the devices connected to this port can
access the network resource through this port.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Port Security Management
Function description:
Shows each port status. In Multihost mode, it shows the port number and its
status, authorized or unauthorized.
Fig. 3-53
Parameter description:
Disable Mode:
When selecting Disable mode for a port in the function 802.1X Port Mode
Configuration, the port is in the uncontrolled port state and does not
apply 802.1X authenticator on it. Any node attached on this port can
access the network without the admittance of 802.1X authenticator. The
Port Status will show the following screen.
Port Number:
The port number to be chosen to show its 802.1X Port Status. The valid
number is Port 1 – 26.
Port Status:
The current 802.1X status of the port. In Disable mode, this field is
Disabled.
802.1x with Multihost mode:
When selecting 802.1x with Multihost mode for a port in the function
802.1X Port Mode Configuration, Devices can access the network
through this port once the authenticator is authorized. The Port Status
will show the following screen. If the port is granted to access the
network, the port status is authorized, otherwise, unauthorized.
Publication date: March., 2011
131
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Param. Setting
Function description:
This function is used to configure the parameters for each port in 802.1x port
security application. Refer to the following parameters description for details.
Fig. 3-54
Parameter description:
Port:
It is the port number to be selected for configuring its associated 802.1x
parameters which are Port control, reAuthMax, txPeriod, Quiet Period,
reAuthEnabled, reAuthPeriod, max. Request, suppTimeout,
serverTimeout and Controlled direction.
Port Control:
This is used to set the operation mode of authorization. There are three
type of operation mode supported, ForceUnauthorized, ForceAuthorized,
Auto.
ꢁ ForceUnauthorized:
The controlled port is forced to hold in the unauthorized state.
ꢁ ForceAuthorized:
The controlled port is forced to hold in the authorized state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ Auto:
The controlled port is set to be in authorized state or unauthorized
state depends on the result of the authentication exchange between
the authentication server and the supplicant.
Default: Auto
reAuthMax(1-10):
The number of authentication attempt that is permitted before the port
becomes unauthorized.
Default: 2
txPeriod(1-65535 s):
A time period to transmitted EAPOL PDU between the authenticator and
the supplicant.
Default: 30
Quiet Period(0-65535 s):
A period of time during which we will not attempt to access the supplicant.
Deafult: 60 seconds
reAuthEnabled:
Choose whether regular authentication will take place in this port.
Default: ON
reAuthPeriod(1-65535 s):
A non-zero number seconds between the periodic re-authentication of
the supplicant.
Default: 3600
max. Request(1-10):
The maximum of number times that the authenticator will retransmit an
EAP Request to the supplicant before it times out the authentication
session. The valid range: 1 – 10.
Default: 2 times
suppTimeout(1-65535 s):
A timeout condition in the exchange between the authenticator and the
supplicant. The valid range: 1 –65535.
Default: 30 seconds.
serverTimeout(1-65535 s):
A timeout condition in the exchange between the authenticator and the
authentication server. The valid range: 1 –65535.
Default: 30 seconds
Publication date: March., 2011
133
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18. Alarm Configuration
Alarm Configuration
Events Configuration
Function name:
Events Configuration
Function description:
The Trap Events Configuration function is used to enable the switch to send
out the trap information while pre-defined trap events occurred. The switch
offers 21 different trap events to users for switch management. The trap
information can be sent out in tow ways, including email and trap. The
message will be sent while users tick (ꢁ) the trap event individually on the
web page shown as below.
Fig. 3-55
Parameter description:
Trap: Cold Start, Warm Start, Link Down, Link Up, Authentication
Failure, User login, User logout
STP: STP Topology Changed, STP Disabled, STP Enabled
LACP: LACP Disabled, LACP Enabled, LACP Member Added,
LACP Port Failure
GVRP: GVRP Disabled, GVRP Enabled
VLAN: Port-based VLAN Enabled, Tag-based VLAN Enabled
Module Swap: Module Inserted, Module Removed, Dual Media Swapped
Function name:
Publication date: Sep, 2009
134
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Email Configuration
Function description:
Alarm configuration is used to configure the persons who should receive the
alarm message via either email. It depends on your settings. An email address
has to be set in the web page of alarm configuration (See Fig. 3-49). Then,
user can read the trap information from the email. This function provides 6
email addresses. The 21 different trap events will be sent out to SNMP
Manager when trap event occurs. After ticking trap events, you can fill in your
desired email addresses. Then, please click <Apply> button to complete the
alarm configuration. It will take effect in a few seconds.
Fig. 3-56
Parameter description:
Email:
Mail Server: the IP address of the server transferring your email.
Username: your username on the mail server.
Password: your password on the mail server.
Email Address 1 – 6: email address that would like to receive the
alarm message.
Publication date: March., 2011
135
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-19. Configuration
The switch supports three copies of configuration, including the default
configuration, working configuration and user configuration for your configuration
management. All of them are listed and described below respectively.
ꢂ Default Configuration:
This is Manufacture’s setting and cannot be altered. In Web UI, two restore
default functions are offered for the user to restore to the default setting of the
switch. One is the function of “Restore Default Configuration included default IP
address”, the IP address will restore to default “192.168.1.1” as you use it. The
other is the function of “Restore Default Configuration without changing current IP
address”, the IP address will keep the same one that you had saved before by
performing this function.
ꢂ Working Configuration:
It is the configuration you are using currently and can be changed any time.
The configurations you are using are saved into this configuration file. This is
updated each time as you press <Apply> button.
ꢂ User Configuration:
It is the configuration file for the specified or backup purposes and can be
updated while having confirmed the configuration. You can retrieve it by performing
Restore User Configuration.
Fig. 3-57
Publication date: Sep, 2009
136
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-19-1. Save/Restore
Function name:
Save As Start Configuration
Function description:
Save the current configuration as a start configuration file in flash memory.
Fig. 3-58
Function name:
Save As User Configuration
Function description:
Save the current configuration as a user configuration file in flash memory.
Fig. 3-59
Publication date: Sep, 2009
137
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Restore Default Configuration (includes default IP address)
Function description:
Restore Default Configuration function can retrieve Manufacture’s setting to
replace the start configuration. And the IP address of the switch will also be
restored to 192.168.1.1.
Fig. 3-60
Function name:
Restore Default Configuration (excludes current IP address)
Function description:
Restore Default Configuration function can retrieve Manufacture’s setting to
replace the start configuration. However, the switch’s current IP address that
the user set up will not be changed and will NOT be restored to 192.168.1.1 as
well.
Fig. 3-61
Publication date: Sep, 2009
138
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Restore User Configuration
Function description:
Restore User Configuration function can retrieve the previous confirmed
working configuration stored in the flash memory to update start configuration.
When completing to restore the configuration, the system’s start configuration
is updated and will be changed its system settings after rebooting the system.
Fig. 3-62
Publication date: Sep, 2009
139
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-19-2. Config File
Function name:
Config File
Function description:
With this function, user can back up or reload the config files of Save As Start
or Save As User via TFTP.
Fig. 3-63
Parameter description:
Export File Path:
Export Start:
Export Save As Start’s config file stored in the flash.
Export User-Conf:
Export Save As User’s config file stored in the flash.
Import File Path:
Import Start:
Import Save As Start’s config file stored in the flash.
Import User-Conf:
Import Save As User’s config file stored in the flash.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
140
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20. Security
Function name:
Mirror Configuration
Function description:
Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network. For example, we
assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port
respectively, thus, the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for
monitoring.
Fig. 3-64
Parameter description:
Mode:
Used for the activation or de-activation of Port Mirror function. Default is
disable.
Monitoring Port:
Set up the port for monitoring. Valid port is Port 1~26 and default is
Port 1.
Monitored Ingress Port:
Set up the port for being monitored. It only monitor the packets received
by the port you set up. Just tick the check box (ꢁ) beside the port x and
valid port is Port 1~26.
Monitored Egress Port:
Set up the port for being monitored. It only monitor the packets
transmitted by the port you set up. Just tick the check box (ꢁ) beside
the port x and valid port is Port 1~26.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
141
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Isolated Group
Function description:
Isolated Group function can let the port be independent of other ports in the
Isolated group, and the communication is also forbidden between these ports.
But, the ports of the Isolated group are still able to communicate with the ports
of the non-Isolated group. With this design, it will be helpful to the
administrator to immediately find and solve the port that results in the
occurrence of looping problems in the network.
Fig. 3-65
Parameter description:
Mode:
Used for the activation or de-activation of Isolated Group function.
Default is disable
Isolated Group:
User can choose any port to be the member of this group. Just tick the
check box (ꢁ) beside the port x and valid port is Port 1~26. In this group,
all of these member ports cannot forward packets with each other. Thus,
the switch will not be capable of forwarding any packets in case its all
ports become the members of the Isolated group.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-21. Bandwidth
Function name:
Ingress Bandwidth Setting
Function description:
Ingress Bandwidth Setting function is used to set up the limit of Ingress
bandwidth for each port.
Fig. 3-66
Parameter description:
Port No.:
Choose the port that you would like this function to work on it. Valid
range of the port is 1~26.
Rate:
Set up the limit of Ingress bandwidth for the port you choose. Incoming
traffic will be discarded if the rate exceeds the value you set up in Data
Rate field. Pause frames are also generated if flow control is enabled.
The format of the packet limits to unicast, broadcast and multicast. Valid
value of Port 1~24 ranges from 66~102400, and Port 25~26 ranges from
66~1024000 with the minimum unit of 1. Default value of Port 1~24 is
102400 and Port 25~26 is 1024000.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
143
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Egress Bandwidth Setting
Function description:
Egress Bandwidth Setting function is used to set up the limit of Egress
bandwidth for each port.
Fig. 3-67
Parameter description:
Port No.:
Choose the port that you would like this function to work on it. Valid
range of the port is 1~26.
Rate:
Set up the limit of Egress bandwidth for the port you choose. Packet
transmission will be delayed if the rate exceeds the value you set up in
Data Rate field. Traffic may be lost if egress buffers run full. The format
of the packet limits to unicast, broadcast and multicast. Valid value of
Port 1~24 ranges from 66~102400, and Port 25~26 ranges from
66~1024000 with the minimum unit of 1. Default value of Port 1~24 is
102400 and Port 25~26 is 1024000.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Storm
Function description:
Bandwidth Management function is used to set up the limit of Ingress and
Egress bandwidth for each port.
Fig. 3-68
Parameter description:
Storm Type:
Disable:
Disable the function of the bandwidth storm control.
BC (Broadcast Storm Control):
Enable the function of bandwidth storm control for broadcast
packets.
UC (Unknown Unicast Storm Control):
Enable the function of bandwidth storm control for unknown unicast
packets. These packets are the MAC address that had not
completed the learning process yet.
BC, UC (Broadcast, Unknown Unicast Storm Control):
Enable the function of bandwidth storm control for broadcast and
Unknown Unicast Storm packets in transmission
MC (Multicast Storm Control):
Enable the function of bandwidth storm control for multicast packets.
BC, MC (Broadcast, Multicast Storm Control):
Enable the function of bandwidth storm control for broadcast and
multicast Storm packets in transmission.
Publication date: March., 2011
145
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UC, MC (Unknown Unicast, Multicast Storm Control):
Enable the function of bandwidth storm control for Unknown
Unicast and multicast Storm packets in transmission.
BC, UC, MC (Broadcast, Unknown Unicast, Multicast Storm Control):
Enable the function of bandwidth storm control for all packets in
transmission.
Rate :
Set up the limit of bandwidth for storm type you choose. Valid value of
the storm rate ranges:
FE Ports: 64 - 102400 (Kbps)
GE Ports: 1024 - 1024000 (Kbps).
And only integer is acceptable. Default is 102400.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22. QoS(Quality of Service Configuration)
The switch supports 5 kinds of QoS, are as follows, MAC Priority, 802.1p
Priority, IP TOS Priority, and DiffServ DSCP Priority. Port Based Priority has a
special name called VIP Port in the switch. Any packets enter VIP Port will have
highest transmitting priority. MAC Priority act on the destination address of MAC in
packets. VLAN tagged Priority field is effected by 802.1p Priority setting. IP TOS
Priority affects TOS fields of IP header, and you can find it has 8-bit SERVICE TYPE
field that specifies how the datagram should be handled. The field could be divided
into six subfields as follows, PRECEDENCE (3 bits), D-Type (Delay Priority, 1 bit ),
T-Type (Throughput Priority, 1bit), R-Type (Reliability Priority, 1bit ), M-Type
(Monetary Cost Priority, 1bit ), and UNUSED (1bit ).
User can randomly control these fields to achieve some special QoS goals.
When bits D, T, R, or M set, the D bit requests low delay, the T bit requests high
throughput, the R bit requests high reliability, and the M bit requests low cost.
DiffServ DSCP Priority act on DSCP field of IP Header. In the late 1990s, the
IETF redefined the meaning of the 8-bit SERVICE TYPE field to accommodate a set
of differentiated services (DS). Under the differentiated services interpretation, the
first six bits comprise a codepoint, which is sometimes abbreviated DSCP, and the
last two bits are left unused.
High Priority Packet streams will experience less delay into the switch. For
handing different priority packets, each egress port has designed up to 4 queues.
Each QoS is influenced by two scheduling, WRR (Weighted Round Robin) and
Strict Priority as well. When you finish to set the priority mapping to the queue, WRR
scheduling will distribute the bandwidth according to the weight you set for 4 queues
(queue 0 to queue 3). Another scheduling is Strict Priority dedicated for the function
named VIP Port of QoS. While we select some ports as the VIP Port, these ports
will own the highest transmitting priority in egress queue of the switch.
The QoS functions as we mentioned above are able to enabled at the same
time. But, the following precedence will decide whether these functions work or not.
1. Enable both VIP and TOS. Choose priorities of VIP and TOS.
2. Enable both VIP and DSCP. Choose priorities of VIP and DSCP.
3. Enable both TOS and DSCP. Choose "DSCP".
4. Enable both VIP and DSCP. Choose priorities of VIP and DSCP.
5. Enable both 802.1p and TOS. Choose "TOS".
6. Enable both 802.1p and DSCP. Choose "DSCP".
7. Enable both 802.1p and DSCP and TOS. Choose "DSCP".
8. Enable both 802.1p and DSCP and TOS and VIP. Choose priorities of VIP
Publication date: Sep, 2009
147
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and DSCP.
** VIP/DSCP > TOS > 802.1p (Final result)
Function name:
QoS Global Setting
Function description:
When you want to use QoS function, please enable QoS Mode in advance.
Then you can use MAC Priority, 802.1p Priority, IP TOS Priority, DiffServ
DSCP Priority, or VIP Port functions and take effect. In this function, you can
Enable QoS Mode. Choose any of Priority Control, such as 802.1p, TOS,
DSCP. Moreover, you can select Scheduling Method of WRR (Weighted
Round Robin) or Strict Priority. Next, you can arrange Weight values for queue
0 to queue 3.
Fig. 3-69
Parameter description:
QoS Mode:
You can Enable QoS Mode and let QoS function become effective.
Default is Disable.
Priority Control:
Just tick the check box (ꢁ) of 802.1P, TOS, or DSCP Qos and click
Apply button to be in operation.
Scheduling Method:
There are two Scheduling Method, WRR and Strict Priority. Default is
WRR. After you choose any of Scheduling Method, please click Apply
button to be in operation.
Weight (1~55):
Over here, you can make an arrangement to Weight values of Queue 0
to Queue 3. The range of Weight you can set is 1~55. In default, the
weight of Queue 0 is 1, the weight of Queue 1 is 2, the weight of Queue
2 is 4, and the weight of Queue 3 is 8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
802.1p Setting
Function description:
This function will affect the priority of VLAN tag. Based on priority of VLAN tag,
it can arrange 0~8 priorities, priorities can map to 4 queues of the switch
(queue 0~3) and possess different bandwidth distribution according to your
weight setting.
Fig. 3-70
Parameter description:
802.1p Priority Mapping:
Each Priority can select any of Queue 0 ~ Queue 3. In Default, Priority 0
is mapping to Queue 0, Priority 1 is mapping to Queue 0, Priority 2 is
mapping to Queue 1, Priority 3 is mapping to Queue 1, Priority 4 is
mapping to Queue 2, Priority 5 is mapping to Queue 2, Priority 6 is
mapping to Queue 3, and Priority 0 is mapping to Queue 3.
Publication date: March., 2011
149
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
DSCP Setting
Function description:
In the late 1990s, the IETF redefined the meaning of the 8-bit SERVICE TYPE
field to accommodate a set of differentiated services (DS). Under the
differentiated services interpretation, the first six bits comprise a codepoint,
which is sometimes abbreviated DSCP, and the last two bits are left unused.
DSCP can form total 64 (0~63) kinds of Traffic Class based on the
arrangement of 6-bit field in DSCP of the IP packet. In the switch, user is
allowed to set up these 64 kinds of Class that belong to any of queue 0~3.
Fig. 3-71
Parameter description:
DSCP Priority Mapping:
64 kinds of priority traffic as mentioned above, user can set up any of
Queue 0~3. In default, Priority 0~15 are mapping to Queue 0, Priority
16~31 are mapping to Queue 1, Priority 32~47 are mapping to Queue 0,
Priority 48~63 are mapping to Queue 0.
Publication date: Sep, 2009
150
Revision A8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-23. ACL
The MSM-6226 switch access control list (ACL) is probably the most
commonly used object in the IOS. It is used for packet filtering but also for selecting
types of traffic to be analyzed, forwarded, or influenced in some way.
The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes. IPv4, ARP protocol, MAC and VLAN
parameters etc. Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for
TCP/IP. As you create ACEs for ingress classification, you can assign a policy for
each port, the policy number is 1-8, however, each policy can be applied to any port.
This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be working
with.
Note: The High-ACL List rule: When you set on the switch, it will apply the
ACL rules with the top priority. The High-ACL rules will give the top
priority against the other access control rules.
The Low-ACL List rule: When you set on the switch, it will apply the
ACL rules which are lower than some specific packet filtering rules ( e.g.
MAC filtering, IP-MAC-Port Binding).
Function name:
High-ACL List / Low-ACL List
Function description:
The switch ACL function support up to 128 High Access Control List (High-
ACL) and 256 Low Access Control List (Low-ACL List), using the shared
128 High ACEs and 256 Low ACEs for ingress classification. You can create
an ACE and assign this ACE for each port with <Any> or assign this ACE for a
policy or assign this ACE for a port. There are 7 priorities, each port can select
one of policy, then decides which of the following actions would take according
to the packet’s IPv4, EtherType, ARP Protocol, MAC Parameters and VLAN
parameters:
Fig. 3-72
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter description:
Add
To add new access control rule on switch. You must configure the
parameters what described later when you add the new access control
rule.
Edit/ Show:
To modify or monitor the access control configuration rule on switch.
Delete:
To delete existed access control rule on switch.
Fig. 3-73
ACL Configuration:
To add a new ACL rule on switch.
ACL name:
To add a new ACL rule name, A name is composed of any letter (A-Z, a-z)
and digit (0-9) with maximal 8 characters.
Ingress Port Map:
To evoke the ingress ports to join the access control rule. port number is
1~26 or all.
MAC DA/SA:
To input the source and destination MAC filter.
For example: 00-40-c7-00-00-01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-74
VLAN Tag:
To input VLAN Type with 2 type include “any” and “ Tag-based Vlan” If
you choice Tag-based Vlan type then you must input Tag VID in field and
droll the Tag Priority bar to choice the tag priority from 0 to 7.
Fig. 3-75
Ethernet Type:
Fig. 3-76
Publication date: March., 2011
153
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To droll “Ethernet Type” bar and option “any”, “ IPv4”, “ ARP” and
“ Specific” for ACL requirement.
Any:
It is including all frame type
IPv4:
ARP:
It is including all IPv4 protocol frame type
It is including all ARP protocol frame type
Specific: It is specific frame type
Fig. 3-77
IPv4:
To set the IPv4 packet filter function with ACLs, the parameters
shown as below:
Protocol : To droll the bar and you can elect “ Any”, “ICMP”, “ UDP”,
“TCP” and “Other”
Fig. 3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPv4 TOS : To droll the bar and you can elect “ Any”, and “ Specific”. If
you click “ Specific” then you need to set the TOS Value to filter.
Fig. 3-79
Fig. 3-80
TTL Range : To droll the bar and you can elect “ TTL=0”, “TTL=1”,
“TTL=2-254” and “ TTL=255” and set the Time to live value range.
Fig. 3-81
Publication date: March., 2011
155
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPv4 DA/ SA : To droll the bar and you can elect “ Any”, “HOST” and
“Network”.
Fig. 3-82
L4 Destination port : To droll the bar and you can elect “ Any” and
“Specific”. If you click “specific” then you need to set destination port
value.
Fig. 3-83
Fig. 3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4 Source port : To droll the bar and you can elect “ Any” and
“Specific”. If you click “specific” then you need to set source port value.
Fig. 3-85
Fig. 3-86
Action:
To set network packet filter includes “In-band” , “Out-band” and “Modify
Packet for In/Out-Band”.
In-Band / Out-Band:
Forward Decision:
To droll down the bar to elect “No change” , “ Use new forward
map” , “ ORed with new map” and “ Explicit actions”
Use new forward map: When the packet is in-band then it will
forward to new map.
ORed with new map: When the packet is in-band then it will
redirect forward to new map.
Explicit actions: When the packet is in-band then it forward with
explicit action and You need to elect the parameters.
Publication date: March., 2011
157
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 3-87
Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-89
Fig. 3-90
Modify Packet for In/ Out-Band :
Modify Packet -802.1P:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To droll down the bar to elect “Any” and “Specific”. If you click the
“ Specific” then you need to set 802.1p value in the field. default is 0
Fig. 3-91
Modify Packet -QOS:
To droll down the bar to elect “Any” and “Specific”. If you click the
“ Specific” then you need to set QoS value in the field. default is 0
Fig. 3-92
Rate Meter:
To set rate meter function with the bandwidth parameter. The range is
64 to 1024000kbps.
Fig. 3-93
Publication date: March., 2011
159
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3- 24. Diagnostics
Five functions, including Diagnostics, Loopback Test, Ping Test, Auto Ping
and Cable are contained in this function folder for device self-diagnostics. Each of
them will be described in detail orderly in the following sections.
Diagnostics
Diag
Loopback Test
Ping Test
Auto Ping
Cable
Function name:
Diag
Function description:
Diagnostics function provides a set of basic system diagnosis. It let users
know that whether the system is health or needs to be fixed. The basic system
check includes EEPROM test, UART test, DRAM test and Flash test.
Fig. 3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Loopback Test
Function description:
In the Loopback Test function, there are two different loopback tests. One is
Internal Loopback Test and the other is External Loopback Test. The former
test function will not send the test signal outside the switch box. The test signal
only wraps around in the switch box. As to the latter test function, it will send
the test signal to its link partner. If you do not have them connected to active
network devices, i.e. the ports are link down, the switch will report the port
numbers failed. If they all are ok, it just shows OK.
Note: Whatever you choose Internal Loopback Test or External
Loopback Test,these two functions will interfere with the normal
system working, and all packets in sending and receiving also will
stop temporarily.
Fig. 3-96
Publication date: March., 2011
161
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Ping Test
Function description:
Ping Test function is a tool for detecting if the target device is alive or not
through ICMP protocol which abounds with report messages. The switch
provides Ping Test function to let you know that if the target device is available
or not. You can simply fill in a known IP address and then click <Ping> button.
After a few seconds later, the switch will report you the pinged device is alive
or dead in the field of Ping Result.
Fig. 3-97
Parameter description:
IP Address:
An IP address with the version of v4, e.g. 192.168.1.1.
Default Gateway:
IP address of the default gateway.
For more details, please see the section of IP address in Chapter 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Auto Ping
Function description:
Auto Ping function is a tool for detecting if the target device is alive or not
through ICMP protocol which abounds with report messages. The switch
provides auto Ping Test function to let you know that if the target device is
available or not.
Fig. 3-98
Parameter description:
IP Address:
An IP address with the version of v4, e.g. 192.168.1.1.
Interval:
Range is 1 ~300 sec.
Times:
Range is 3 ~100
Publication date: March., 2011
163
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function name:
Cable
Function description:
Cable function is a tool for detecting if the cable per port status is OK or not.
report messages. The switch provides cable Test function to let you know that
if the cable connect to a port is OK or not.
Fig. 3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3- 25. TFTP Server
Function name:
TFTP Server
Function description:
Set up IP address of TFTP server.
Fig. 3-100
Parameter description:
Specify the IP address where the TFTP server locates. Fill in the IP address of
your TFTP server, then press <Apply> button to have the setting taken effect.
Publication date: March., 2011
165
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26. Log
This function shows the log data. The switch provides system log data for
users. There are 16 private trap logs, 5 public trap logs. The switch supports total
120 log entries. For more details on log items, please refer to the section of
Trap/Alarm Configuration and SNMP Configuration.
Function name:
Log Data
Function description:
The Trap Log Data is displaying the log items including all SNMP Private Trap
events, SNMP Public traps and user logs occurred in the system. In the report
table, No., Time and Events are three fields contained in each trap record.
Fig. 3-101
Parameter description:
No.:
Display the order number that the trap happened.
Time:
Display the time that the trap happened.
Events:
Display the trap event name.
Auto Upload Enable:
Switch the enabled or disabled status of the auto upload function.
Upload Log:
Upload log data through tftp.
Clear Log:
Clear log data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-27. Firmware Upgrade
Software upgrade tool is used to help upgrade the software function in order
to fix or improve the function. The switch provides a TFTP client for software
upgrade. This can be done through Ethernet.
Function name:
Firmware Upgrade
Function description:
The switch supports TFTP upgrade tool for upgrading software. If you assure
to upgrade software to a newer version one, you must follow two procedures:
1.) Specifying the IP address where TFTP server locates. In this field, the IP
address of your TFTP server should be filled in.
2.) Specifying what the filename and where the file is. You must specify full path
and filename.
Then, press <Upgrade> button if your download is not successful, the switch
will also be back to “Software Upgrade”, and it will not upgrade the software as well.
When download is completed, the switch starts upgrading software. A reboot
message will be prompted after completing upgrading software. At this time, you
must reboot the switch to have new software worked.
Note: Software upgrade is hazardous if power is off. You must do it carefully.
Fig. 3-102
Parameter description:
TFTP Server: A TFTP server stored the image file you want to upgrade.
Path and Filename: File path and filename stored the image file you want to
upgrade.
Publication date: March., 2011
167
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28. Reboot
We offer you many ways to reboot the switch, including power up, hardware
reset and software reset. You can press the RESET button in the front panel to
reset the switch. After upgrading software, changing IP configuration or changing
VLAN mode configuration, then you must reboot to have the new configuration
taken effect. Here we are discussing is software reset for the “reboot” in the main
menu.
Function name:
Reboot
Function description:
Reboot the switch. Reboot takes the same effect as the RESET button on the
front panel of the switch. It will take around thirty (30) seconds to complete the
system boot.
Fig. 3-103
Parameter description:
Save and Reboot:
Save the current settings as start configuration before rebooting the
switch.
Reboot:
Reboot the system directly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-29. Logout
You can manually logout by performing Logout function. In the switch, it
provides another way to logout. You can configure it to logout automatically.
Function name:
Logout
Function description:
The switch allows you to logout the system to prevent other users from the
system without the permission. If you do not logout and exit the browser, the
switch will automatically have you logout. Besides this manually logout and
implicit logout, you can pull down the <Auto Logout> list at the left-top corner
to explicitly ON/OFF this logout function.
Fig. 3-104
Parameter description:
Auto Logout:
Default is ON. If it is “ON”, and no action and no key is stroke as well in any
function screen more than 3 minutes, the switch will have you logout automatically.
Publication date: March., 2011
169
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Operation of CLI
Management
4-1. CLI Management
Refer to Chapter 2 for basic installation. The following description is the brief of the
network connection.
-- Locate the correct DB-9 null modem cable with female DB-9 connector. Null
modem cable comes with the management switch. Refer to the Appendix B for
null modem cable configuration.
-- Attach the DB-9 female connector to the male DB-9 serial port connector on the
Management board.
-- Attach the other end of the DB-9 cable to an ASCII terminal emulator or PC Com-
1, 2 port. For example, PC runs Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal utility.
-- At “Com Port Properties” Menu, configure the parameters as below: (see the next
section)
Baud rate
Stop bits
Data bits
Parity
57600
1
8
N
Flow control
none
4-1-1. Login
The command-line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface. User can access
the CLI through either a direct serial connection to the device or a Telnet session.
The default values of the managed switch are listed below:
Username: admin
Password: admin
After you login successfully, the prompt will be shown as “#“ if you are the
first login person and your authorization is administrator; otherwise it may show “$“.
See the following two figures. The former means you behave as an administrator
and have the access right of the system. As to the latter, it means you behave as a
guest and are only allowed to view the system without the permission to do any
setting for this switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fig. 4-1
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2. Commands of CLI
To see the commands of the mode, please input “?” after the prompt, then all
commands will be listed in the screen. All commands can be divided into two
categories, including global commands and local commands. Global commands can
be used wherever the mode you are. They are “exit”, “end”, “help”, “history”, “logout”,
“save start”, “save user”, “restore default” and “restore user”. For more details,
please refer to Section 4-2-1.
Command instructions reside in the corresponding modes are local
commands. The same command with the same command name may occur but
perform totally different function in different modes. For example, “show” in IP mode
performs displaying the IP information; however, it performs displaying the system
information in system mode. For more details, please refer to Section 4-2-2.
Fig. 4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2-1. Global Commands of CLI
end
Syntax:
end
Description:
Back to the top mode.
When you enter this command, your current position would move to the top mode. If
you use this command in the top mode, you are still in the position of the top mode.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 # alarm
FEL2P-SW26 (alarm)# events
FEL2P-SW26 (alarm-events)# end
FEL2P-SW26 #
exit
Syntax:
exit
Description:
Back to the previous mode.
When you enter this command, your current position would move back to the
previous mode. If you use this command in the top mode, you are still in the position
of the top mode.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 # trunk
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# exit
FEL2P-SW26 #
Publication date: March., 2011
173
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
help
Syntax:
help
Description:
To show available commands.
Some commands are the combination of more than two words. When you enter this
command, the CLI would show the complete commands. Besides, the command
would help you classify the commands between the local commands and the global
ones.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26# ip
FEL2P-SW26(ip)# help
Commands available:
------------<< Local commands >>------------
disable dhcp
enable dhcp
set dns
Disable DHCP
Enable DHCP, and set dns auto or manual
Set dns
set ip
Set ip and gateway
Show IP Configuration
show
------------<< Global commands >>------------
end
Back to the top mode
exit
Back to the previous mode
Show available commands
Show a list of previously run commands
Logout the system
help
history
logout
restore default
restore user
save start
save user
Restore default config
Restore user config
Save as start config
Save as user config
FEL2P-SW26(ip)#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
history
Syntax:
history [#]
Description:
To show a list of previous commands that you had ever run.
When you enter this command, the CLI would show a list of commands which you
had typed before. The CLI supports up to 256 records. If no argument is typed, the
CLI would list total records up to 256. If optional argument is given, the CLI would
only show the last numbers of records, given by the argument.
Argument:
[#]: show last number of history records. (optional)
Possible value:
[#]: 1, 2, 3, …., 256
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (ip)# history
Command history:
0. ?
1. trunk
2. exit
3. FEL2P-SW26 # trunk
4. FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# exit
5. FEL2P-SW26 #
6. trunk
7. exit
8. alarm
9. events
10. end
11. ip
12. help
13. history
FEL2P-SW26 (ip)# history 3
Command history:
12. help
13. history
14. history 3
FEL2P-SW26 (ip)#
Publication date: March., 2011
175
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
logout
Syntax:
logout
Description:
When you enter this command via Telnet connection, you would logout the system
and disconnect. If you connect the system through direct serial port with RS-232
cable, you would logout the system and be back to the initial login prompt when you
run this command.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26# logout
Managed Switch - FEL2P-SW26
Login:
restore default
Syntax:
restore default
Description:
When you use this function in CLI, the system will show you the information “Do you
want to restore the default IP address?(y/n)”. If you choose Y or y, the IP address
will restore to default “192.168.1.1”. If you choose N or n, the IP address will keep
the same one that you had saved before.
If restoring default successfully, the CLI would prompt if reboot immediately or not. If
you press Y or y, the system would reboot immediately; otherwise, it would be back
to the CLI system. After restoring default configuration, all the changes in the startup
configuration would be lost. After rebooting, the entire startup configuration would
reset to factory default.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26# restore default
Do you want to restore the default ip address?(y/n)
Restoring ...
Restore default configuration successfully.
Do you want to reboot the system?(y/n)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
restore user
Syntax:
restore user
Description:
To restore the startup configuration as user defined configuration. If restoring default
successfully, the CLI would prompt if reboot immediately or not. If you press Y or y,
the system would reboot immediately; others would back to the CLI system. After
restoring user-defined configuration, all the changes in the startup configuration
would be lost. After rebooting, the entire startup configuration would replace as user
defined one.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26# restore user
Restoring ...
Restore user configuration successfully.
Do you want to reboot the system?(y/n)
save start
Syntax:
save start
Description:
To save the current configuration as the start one. When you enter this command,
the CLI would save your current configuration into the non-volatile FLASH. If you
want the configuration still works after rebooting, save the configuration using the
command ‘save stat’.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 # save start
Saving start...
Save Successfully
FEL2P-SW26 #
Publication date: March., 2011
177
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
save user
Syntax:
save user
Description:
To save the current configuration as the user-defined configuration. When you enter
this command, the CLI would save your current configuration into the non-volatile
FLASH as user-defined configuration.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 # save user
Saving user...
Save Successfully
FEL2P-SW26 #
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2-2. Local Commands of CLI
ꢂ802.1x
set quiet-period
Syntax:
set quiet-period <port-range> <sec>
Description:
A timer used by the Authenticator state machine to define periods of time during
when it will not attempt to acquire a Supplicant.
Argument:
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<sec> : timer, range 0-65535
Possible value:
<port range> : 1 to 26
<sec> : 0-65535, default is 60
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# set quiet-period 2 30
set reAuthEnabled
Syntax:
set reAuthEnabled <port-range> <ebl>
Description:
A constant that define whether regular reauthentication will take place on this port.
Argument:
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<ebl> :
0:”OFF” to disable reauthentication
1:”ON” to enable reauthentication
Possible value:
<port range> : 1 to 26
<ebl> : 0 or 1, default is 1
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# set reAuthEnabled 2 1
set reAuthMax
Syntax:
set reAuthMax <port-range> <max>
Description:
The number of reauthentication attempts that are permitted before the port
becomes Unauthorized.
Argument:
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<max> : max. value , range 1-10
Possible value:
Publication date: March., 2011
179
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<port range> : 1 to 26
<max> : 1-10, default is 2
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# set reAuthMax 2 2
set reAuthPeriod
Syntax:
set reAuthPeriod <port-range> <sec>
Description:
A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic
reauthentication of the supplicant.
Argument:
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<sec> : timer, range 1-65535
Possible value:
<port range> : 1 to 26
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 3600
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# set reAuthPeriod 2 3600
set serverTimeout
Syntax:
set serverTimeout <port-range> <sec>
Description:
A timer used by the Backend Authentication state machine in order to determine
timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the Supplicant
or Authentication Server. The initial value of this timer is either suppTimeout or
serverTimeout, as determined by the operation of the Backend Authentication state
machine.
Argument:
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<sec> : timer, range 1-65535
Possible value:
<port range> : 1 to 26
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 30
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# set serverTimeout 2 30
set state
Syntax:
set state <ip> <port-number> <secret-key> <Accounting Service> <Accountin
g Server> <Accounting Port>
Description:
To configure the settings related with 802.1X Radius Server.
Argument:
<ip> : the IP address of Radius Server, and the IP format is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
<port-number> : the service port of Radius Server(Authorization port),
range 1~65535
<secret-key> : set up the value of secret-key, and the length of secret-key is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from 1 to 31
<Accounting Service> : 0 for disable, 1 for enable
<Accounting Server> : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
<Accounting Port> :1~65535
Possible value:
<port-number> : 1~65535, default 1812
<Accounting Service> : 0 for disable, 1 for enable
<Accounting Server> : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
<Accounting Port> :1~65535
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(802.1X)# set state 192.168.2.252 1812 winradius 1 192.168.2.252
225
FEL2P-SW26(802.1X)# show state
Radius Server
Port Number
Secret Key
: 192.168.2.252
: 1812
: winradius
Accounting Service : Enable
Accounting Server : 192.168.2.252
Accounting Port
: 225
FEL2P-SW26(802.1X)#
set suppTimeout
Syntax:
set suppTimeout <port-range> <sec>
Description:
A timer used by the Backend Authentication state machine in order to determine
timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the Supplicant
or Authentication Server. The initial value of this timer is either suppTimeout or
serverTimeout, as determined by the operation of the Backend Authentication state
machine.
Argument:
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<sec> : timer, range 1-65535
Possible value:
<port range> : 1 to 26
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 30
Example:
MSM-6226 (802.1x)# set suppTimeout 2 30
set txPeriod
Syntax:
set txPeriod <port-range> <sec>
Description:
A timer used by the Authenticator PAE state machine to determine when an EAPOL
PDU is to be transmitted.
Publication date: March., 2011
181
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Argument:
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<sec> : timer, range 1-65535
Possible value:
<port range> : 1 to 26
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 30
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# set txPeriod 2 30
show mode
Syntax:
show mode
Description:
To display the mode of each port.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(802.1X)# show mode
====== ============
1
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Advanced 802.1X
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
:
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
:
:
Show parameter
Syntax:
show parameter
Description:
To display the parameter settings of each port.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(802.1x)# show parameter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
port 1) port control : Auto
reAuthMax
txPeriod
: 2
: 30
Quiet Period : 60
reAuthEnabled : ON
reAuthPeriod : 3600
max. Request : 2
suppTimeout : 30
serverTimeout : 30
:
:
:
show security
Syntax:
show security
Description:
To display the authentication status of each port.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
MSM-6226FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# show security
Port
Mode
Status
====== ============ ==============
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Normal
Unauthorized
Disable
Disable
Disable
10 Authorized Entries :0
11
12
Disable
Disable
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show state
Syntax:
show state
Description:
To display the Radius server configuration.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (802.1x)# show state
Radius Server: 192.168.1.115
Port Number : 1812
Secret Key : WinRadius
ꢂaccount
add
Syntax:
add <name>
Description:
To create a new guest user. When you create a new guest user, you must type in
password and confirm password.
Argument:
<name> : new account name
Possible value:
<name> : A string must be at least 5 character.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(account)# add aaaaa
Password:
Confirm Password:
FEL2P-SW26(account)#
del
Syntax:
del <name>
Description:
To delete an existing account.
Argument:
<name> : existing user account
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(account)# del aaaaa
Account aaaaa deleted
modify
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syntax:
modify <name>
Description:
To change the username and password of an existing account.
Argument:
<name> : existing user account
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(account)# modify aaaaa
username/password: the length is from 5 to 15.
Current username (aaaaa):bbbbb
New password:
Confirm password:
Username changed successfully.
Password changed successfully.
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To show system account, including account name and identity.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(account)# show
Account Name
Identity
----------------- ---------------
admin
guest
bbbbb
Administrator
guest
guest
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢂalarm
<<email>>
del mail-address
Syntax:
del mail-address <#>
Description:
To remove the e-mail address.
Argument:
<#>: email address number, range: 1 to 6
Possible value:
<#>: 1 to 6
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-email)# del mail-address 2
del server-user
Syntax:
del server-user
Description:
To remove the server, user account and password.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-email)# del server-user
set mail-address
Syntax:
set mail-address <#> <mail address>
Description:
To set up the email address.
Argument:
<#> : email address number, range: 1 to 6
<mail address> : email address
Possible value:
<#>: 1 to 6
Example:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set server
Syntax:
set server <ip>
Description:
To set up the IP address of the email server.
Argument:
<ip>:email server ip address or domain name
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-email)# set server 192.168.1.6
set user
Syntax:
set user <username>
Description:
To set up the account of the email server.
Argument:
<username>: email server account
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-email)# set user admin
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the configuration of e-mail trap event.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-email)# show
Mail Server
Username
: 192.168.1.6
: admin
Password
: ****************
Email Address 1: [email protected]
Email Address 2:
Email Address 3:
Email Address 4:
Email Address 5:
Email Address 6:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<<events>>
del all
Syntax:
del all <range>
Description:
To disable email and trap of events.
Argument:
<range>:del the range of email and trap of events, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to
25
Possible value:
<range>: 1~25
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-events)# del all 1-3
del email
Syntax:
del email <range>
Description:
To disable the email of the events.
Argument:
<range>:del the range of email, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 25
Possible value:
<range>: 1~25
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-events)# del email 1-3
del trap
Syntax:
del trap <range>
Description:
To disable the trap of the events.
Argument:
<range>:del the range of trap, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 25
Possible value:
<range>: 1~25
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-events)# del trap 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set all
Syntax:
set all <range>
Description:
To enable email and trap of events.
Argument:
<range>:set the range of email and trap of events, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to
25
Possible value:
<range>: 1~25
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-events)# set all 1-3
set email
Syntax:
set email <range>
Description:
To enable the email of the events.
Argument:
<range>:set the range of email, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 25
Possible value:
<range>: 1~25
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-events)# set email 1-3
set trap
Syntax:
set trap <range>
Description:
To enable the trap of the events.
Argument:
<range>:set the range of trap, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 25
Possible value:
<range>: 1~25
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-events)# set trap 1-3
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
The Show here is used to display the configuration of alarm event.
Argument:
None.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(alarm-events)# show
Events
Email
Trap
-----------------------------------------
1 Cold Start
v
v
v
v
v
2 Warm Start
3 Link Down
4 Link Up
5 Authentication Failure
6 User Login
7 User Logout
8 STP Topology Changed
9 STP Disabled
10 STP Enabled
11 LACP Disabled
12 LACP Enabled
13 LACP Member Added
14 LACP Port Failure
15 GVRP Disabled
16 GVRP Enabled
17 Port-based Vlan Enabled
18 Tag-based Vlan Enabled
19 Metro-mode Vlan Enabled
20 Module Inserted
21 Module Removed
22 Dual Media Swapped
23 Looping Detected
24 IP-MAC Binding Offered
25 IP-MAC Binding Released
v
show (alarm)
Syntax:
show
Description:
The Show for alarm here is used to display the configuration of Trap or E-mail.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (alarm)# show email
Mail Server
Username
:
:
Password
: ****************
Email Address 1:
Email Address 2:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Email Address 3:
Email Address 4:
Email Address 5:
Email Address 6:
FEL2P-SW26 (alarm)# show events
1 Cold Start
v
v
v
4 Link Up
5 Authentication Failure
6 User Login
7 User Logout
8 STP Topology Changed
9 STP Disabled
10 STP Enabled
11 LACP Disabled
12 LACP Enabled
13 LACP Member Added
14 LACP Port Failure
15 GVRP Disabled
16 GVRP Enabled
17 Port-based Vlan Enabled
18 Tag-based Vlan Enabled
19 Metro-mode Vlan Enabled
20 Module Inserted
21 Module Removed
22 Dual Media Swapped
23 Looping Detected
24 IP-MAC Binding Offered
25 IP-MAC Binding Released
v
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢂautologout
autologout
Syntax:
autologout <time>
Description:
To set up the timer of autologout.
Argument:
<time>: range 1 to 3600 seconds, 0 for autologout off, current setting is 180
seconds.
Possible value:
< time >: 0,1-3600
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 # autologout 3600
Set autologout time to 3600 seconds
ꢂbandwidth
set egress
Syntax:
set egress <range> < rate>
Description:
To set up the egress-rate of the ports.
Argument:
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
< rate>: 64-1024000(Kb).
port 1-24: 64-102400(Kb); port 25-26: 64-1024000(Kb)
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<rate>: 64-102400(Kb) for port 1-24; 64-1024000(Kb) for port 25-26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)# set egress 8-12 3780
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)# show
Port Ingress Rate(Kb)
Egress Rate(Kb) Storm Type Storm Rate(Kb)
snmp mode
stp
====== ================== ================= ============ ================
Enter into system mode
1
2
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
3776
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3776
10
3776
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
3776
3776
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
set ingress-rate
Syntax:
set ingress <range> <rate>
Description:
To set up the ingress-rate of the ports.
Argument:
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<rate>: 64-1024000(Kb).
port 1-24: 64-102400(Kb); port 25-26: 64-1024000(Kb)
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<rate>: 64-102400(Kb) for port 1-24; 64-1024000(Kb) for port 25-26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (bandwidth)# set ingress 1-16 100
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)# show
Port Ingress Rate(Kb)
Egress Rate(Kb) Storm Type Storm Rate(Kb)
snmp mode
stp
====== ================== ================= ============ ================
Enter into system mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
7
102400
102400
102400
3776
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
8
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
19520
3776
3776
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
3776
3776
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
19520
19520
19520
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
set storm
Syntax:
set storm <range> <type> < rate>
Description:
To set up the storm control of the ports.
Argument:
<range>:syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<type>:
0 - Disable
1 - BC
2 - UC
for broadcast storm
for unicast storm
3 - BC,UC
4 - MC
for both broadcast and unicast storm
for multicast storm
5 - BC,MC
6 - UC,MC
for both broadcast and multicast storm
for both unicast and multicast storm
7 - BC,UC,MC for broadcast, unicast and multicast storm<data_rate>: 1-100.
<rate>: 64 - 1024000 (Kbps).
FE port: 64 - 102400 (Kbps)
GE port: 64 - 1024000 (Kbps).
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<type> : 0 to 7
<rate>: 64- 1024000 (Kbps)
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)# set storm 20 3 5000
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)#show
Port Ingress Rate(Kb)
Egress Rate(Kb) Storm Type Storm Rate(Kb)
====== ================== ================= ============ ================
….
5
102400
102400
DISABLE
102400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
7
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
19520
102400
102400
3776
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
BC,UC
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
4992
8
9
3776
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
3776
3776
3776
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
19520
19520
19520
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)#
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display all current settings of the bandwidth.
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)# show
FEL2P-SW26(bandwidth)#show
Port Ingress Rate(Kb)
Egress Rate(Kb) Storm Type Storm Rate(Kb)
====== ================== ================= ============ ================
….
5
6
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
3776
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
7
8
9
3776
10
11
3776
3776
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
102400
102400
102400
19520
3776
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
BC,UC
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
4992
19520
19520
19520
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
102400
102400
102400
102400
1024000
1024000
ꢂconfig-file
export start
Syntax:
export start
Description:
To run the export start function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (config-file)# export start
Export successful.
export user-conf
Syntax:
export user-conf
Description:
To run the export user-conf function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (config-file)# export user-conf
Export successful.
import start
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syntax:
import start
Description:
To run the import start function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (config-file)# import start
Import successful.
import user-conf
Syntax:
import user-conf
Description:
To run the import user-conf function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (config-file)# import user-conf
Import successful.
set export-path
Syntax:
set export-path <filepath>
Description:
To set up the file path and filename that user would like to export.
Argument:
<filepath>:filepath and filename
Possible value:
<filepath>:filepath and filename
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (config-file)# set export-path log/21511.txt
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set import-path
Syntax:
set import-path <filepath>
Description:
To set up the filepath and filename that user would like to import.
Argument:
<filepath>:filepath and filename
Possible value:
<filepath>:filepath and filename
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (config-file)# set import-path log/21511.txt
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the information of the config file.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(config-file)# show
TFTP Server IP Address: 192.168.3.111
Export Path and Filename: log/21511.txt
Import Path and Filename: log/21511.txt
ꢂdhcp-boot
set
Syntax:
set <sec>
Description:
To set up the delay time for DHCP Boot.
Argument:
<sec>:range syntax: 0, 1-30. The value “0” is to disable dhcp-boot delay
Possible value:
<sec>:0-30
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (dhcp-boot)# set 30
show
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the status of DHCP Boot.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(dhcp-boot)# show
DHCP Boot : Enable
Second
: 30
FEL2P-SW26(dhcp-boot)#
ꢂdiag
<<autoping>>
disable
Syntax:
disable
Description:
Disable auto ping function on switch
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (diag-autoping)# disable
enable
Syntax:
enable
Description:
Enable auto ping function on switch
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (diag-autoping)# enable
set
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syntax:
set <IP address> <interval> <times>
Description:
To set auto ping function on switch
Argument:
<IP address> : IPv4 format
<interval>: 1~300 (sec)
<times>: 3~100
Possible value:
<IP address> : IPv4 format
<interval>: 1~300 (sec)
<times>: 3~100
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(diag-autoping)# set 192.168.2.22 100 3
FEL2P-SW26(diag-autoping)# show
Auto Ping state :Enabled
IP address
Interval(sec) :100
Times :3
:192.168.2.22
FEL2P-SW26(diag-autoping)#
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To show auto ping function on switch
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(diag-autoping)# show
Auto Ping state :Enabled
IP address
Interval(sec) :100
Times :3
:192.168.2.22
FEL2P-SW26(diag-autoping)#
<<cable>>
cable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syntax:
cable <port>
Description:
To enable cable diagnostic function on switch
Argument:
<port> : syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<port> : 1 to 26.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(diag)# cable 1-5
port 1: cable Ok (2 pairs, length +/- 10 meters)
pair A Ok, length 10 meters
pair B Ok, length 10 meters
diag
Syntax:
diag
Description:
Diag is used to test whether EEPROM, UART, DRAM and Flash is normal or not.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (diag)# diag
EEPROM Test : OK
UART Test : OK
DRAM Test : OK
Flash Test : OK
Loopback
Syntax:
loopback
Description:
For Internal/External Loopback Test.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(diag)# loopback
Internal Loopback Test : OK
External Loopback Test : Port 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 Fail
Publication date: March., 2011
201
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEL2P-SW26(diag)#
ping
Syntax:
ping <ip>
Description:
To confirm that whether the remote end-station or switch itself is alive or not.
Argument:
<ip> : IP address or domain name
Possible value:
IP address, e.g. 192.168.2.65 or domain name, e.g. tw.yahoo.com
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(diag)# ping 192.168.2.22
Gateway
: 192.168.2.254
192.168.2.22 is alive.
FEL2P-SW26(diag)#
ꢂfirmware
set upgrade-path
Syntax:
set upgrade-path <filepath>
Description:
To set upgrade file path and name on switch.
Argument:
<filepath>: upgrade file path and name
Possible value:
<filepath>: upgrade file path and name
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (firmware)# set upgrade-path icpdas_ms6226_v0.99.img
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the information of tftp server and upgrade-path and file name.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(firmware)# show
TFTP Server IP Address: 192.168.3.111
Path and Filename
: icpdas_ms2226_v0.99.img
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
upgrade
Syntax:
upgrade
Description:
To run the software upgrade function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(firmware)# upgrade
Upgrading firmware ...
ꢂgvrp
disable
Syntax:
disable
Description:
To disable the gvrp function
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# disable
enable
Syntax:
enable
Description:
To enable the gvrp function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# enable
group
Syntax:
group <group number>
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description:
To enter any of gvrp group for changing gvrp group setting. You can change the
applicant or registrar mode of existing gvrp group per port.
Argument:
<group number>: enter which gvrp group you had created, using value is vid.
Available range: 1 to 4094
Possible value:
<group number>: 1~4094
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# show group
GVRP group information
Current Dynamic Group Number: 1
VID Member Port
---- --------------------------------------------------
2
5
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# group 2
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp-group-2)# set applicant 1-6 non-participant
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp-group-2)# show
GVRP group VID: 2
Port Applicant
Registrar
---- --------------- ---------
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Non-Participant Normal
Non-Participant Normal
Non-Participant Normal
Non-Participant Normal
Non-Participant Normal
Non-Participant Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
12 Normal
13 Normal
:
:
23 Normal
24 Normal
25 Normal
26 Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp-group-2)# set registrar 1-10 fixed
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp-group-2)# show
GVRP group VID: 2
Port Applicant
Registrar
---- --------------- ---------
1
2
3
4
5
Non-Participant Fixed
Non-Participant Fixed
Non-Participant Fixed
Non-Participant Fixed
Non-Participant Fixed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
7
8
9
Non-Participant Fixed
Normal
Normal
Normal
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Normal
10 Normal
17 Normal
:
:
23 Normal
24 Normal
25 Normal
26 Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
set applicant
Syntax:
set applicant <range> <normal|non-participant>
Description:
To set default applicant mode for each port.
Argument:
<range>: port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<normal>: set applicant as normal mode
<non-participant>: set applicant as non-participant mode
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<normal|non-participant>: normal or non-participant
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# set applicant 1-10 non-participant
set registrar
Syntax:
set registrar <range> <normal | fixed | forbidden>
Description:
To set default registrar mode for each port.
Argument:
<range>: port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<normal>: set registrar as normal mode
<fixed>: set registrar as fixed mode
<forbidden>: set registrar as forbidden mode
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<normal|fixed|forbidden>: normal or fixed or forbidden
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# set registrar 1-5 fixed
set restricted
Syntax:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set restricted <range> <enable | disable>
Description:
To set the restricted mode for each port.
Argument:
<range>: port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<enable>: set restricted as enabled
<disable>: set restricted as disabled
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<enable | disable>: enable or disable
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# set restricted 1-10 enable
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# show config
GVRP state: Enable
Port Join Time Leave Time LeaveAll Time
Applicant
Registrar Restricted
---- --------- ---------- ------------- --------------- --------- ----------
1
2
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Normal
Normal
:
10
:
22
23
24
25
26
20
20
20
20
20
60
60
60
60
60
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Normal
set timer
Syntax:
set timer <range> <join> <leave> < leaveall >
Description:
To set gvrp join time, leave time, and leaveall time for each port.
Argument:
<range> : port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<join>: join timer, available from 20 to 100
<leave>: leave timer, available from 60 to 300
<leaveall>: leaveall timer, available from 1000 to 5000
Leave Time must equal double Join Time at least.
Possible value:
<range> : 1 to 26
<join>: 20 to 100
<leave>: 60 to 300
<leaveall>: 1000 to 5000
Example:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEL2P-SW26 (gvrp)# set timer 2-8 25 80 2000
show config
Syntax:
show config
Description:
To display the gvrp configuration.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(gvrp)# show config
GVRP state: Disable
Port Join Time Leave Time LeaveAll Time Applicant
Registrar Restricted
---- --------- ---------- ------------- --------------- --------- ----------
1
2
3
4
20
20
20
20
60
60
60
60
1000
1000
1000
1000
:
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
:
:
23
24
25
26
20
20
20
20
60
60
60
60
1000
1000
1000
1000
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
show counter
Syntax:
show counter <port>
Description:
To show counter of the port.
Argument:
<port>: port number, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<port>: 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(gvrp)# show counter 2
GVRP Counter port: 2
Counter Name
Received Transmitted
-------------------- -------- -----------
Total GVRP Packets
Invalid GVRP Packets
LeaveAll message
JoinEmpty message
JoinIn message
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
----
0
0
0
0
LeaveEmpty message
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty message
0
0
show group
Syntax:
show group
Description:
To show the gvrp group.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(gvrp)# show group
GVRP group information
Current Dynamic Group Number: 0
VID Member Port
---- --------------------------------------------------
ꢂhostname
hostname
Syntax:
hostname <name>
Description:
To set up the hostname of the switch.
Argument:
<name>: hostname, max. 40 characters.
Possible value:
<name>: hostname, max. 40 characters.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 # hostname Company
Company#
ꢂmulticast
add group-filter
Syntax:
add group-filter <vid> <start> <end> <port>
Description:
To add group filter function on switch.
Argument:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
<start>: ip address format.
<end>: ip address format.
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Possible value:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
<start>: ip address format.
<end>: ip address format.
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# add group-filter 2 224.1.1.1 230.255.255.255 10-15
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show group-filtering 2
Index
: 1
Start Address : 224.1.1.1
End Address : 230.255.255.255
Port Member : 10,11,12,13,14,15
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)#
add igmp-vlan
Syntax:
add igmp-vlan <vid>
Description:
To add igmp vlan function on switch.
Argument:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
Possible value:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# add igmp-vlan 3
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-vlan
Index
VID
----- -------
1
2
3
1
2
3
deletegroup-filter
Syntax:
delete group-filter <vid> <index>
Description:
To delete group-filter function on switch.
Argument:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
<index>: from 1 to 16 value.
Possible value:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
<index>: from 1 to 16 value.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# delete group-filter 2 1
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show group-filtering 2
None entry exist.
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)#
deleteigmp-vlan
Syntax:
delete igmp-vlan <vid>
Description:
To delete igmp-vlan function on switch.
Argument:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
Possible value:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# delete igmp-vlan 2
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-vlan
Index
VID
----- -------
1
2
1
3
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)#
edit group-filter
Syntax:
edit group-filter <vid> <index> <start> <end> <port>
Description:
To delete igmp-vlan function on switch.
Argument:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
<index>: from 1 to 16 value.
<start>: ip address format.
<end>: ip address format.
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value..
Possible value:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
<index>: from 1 to 16 value.
<start>: ip address format.
<end>: ip address format.
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value..
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# add group-filter 3 224.1.1.1 225.255.255.255 10-15
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show group-filtering 3
Index
: 1
Start Address : 224.1.1.1
End Address : 225.255.255.255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Port Member : 10,11,12,13,14,15
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# edit group-filter 3 1 224.1.1.1 226.255.255.255 10-
11
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show group-filtering 3
Index
: 1
Start Address : 224.1.1.1
End Address : 226.255.255.255
Port Member : 10,11
set unregfld-enable
Syntax:
set unregfld-enable <state>
Description:
To set unregister multicast flooding state function on switch.
Argument:
<state>: 0(disable), 1(enable)
Possible value:
<state>: 0(disable), 1(enable)
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set unregfld-enable 1
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-setting
IGMP Snooping
: Enable
: Enable
: 125
Unregister Multicast Flooding
General Query Interval
General Query Max Response Time : 10
General Query Timeout
Specific Query Count
: 11
: 2
Specific Query Max Response Time : 1
Specific Query Timeout : 2
Port Multicast Group Limit IGMP Router
---- --------------------- -----------
1
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
v
v
v
11
12
...(q to quit)
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set gnlqry-interval
Syntax:
set gnlqry-interval <sec>
Description:
To set general query interval function on switch.
Argument:
<sec>: from 1 to 2000 value.
Possible value:
<sec>: 1 to 2000 .
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set gnlqry-interval 20
set gnlqry-response
Syntax:
set gnlqry-response <sec>
Description:
To set general query max response time
Argument:
<sec>: from 1 to 10 value.
Possible value:
<sec>: 1 to 10 .
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set gnlqry-response 5
set gnlqry-timeout
Syntax:
set gnlqry-response <sec>
Description:
To set general query timeout
Argument:
<sec>: from 1 to 30 value.
Possible value:
<sec>: 1 to 30 .
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set gnlqry-timeout 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set group-limit
Syntax:
set group-limit <port> <limit>
Description:
To set multicast group limit
Argument:
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value.
<limit>: from 0 to 256 value
Possible value:
<port>: 1 to 26.
<limit>: 0 to 256.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set group-limit 10-12 55
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-setting
IGMP Snooping
: Enable
: Enable
: 20
Unregister Multicast Flooding
General Query Interval
General Query Max Response Time : 5
General Query Timeout
Specific Query Count
: 15
: 2
Specific Query Max Response Time : 1
Specific Query Timeout : 2
Port Multicast Group Limit IGMP Router
---- --------------------- -----------
1
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
55
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
v
v
v
11
55
12
55
...(q to quit)
set igmpsnp-enable
Syntax:
set igmpsnp-enable <state>
Description:
To set igmp snooping state
Argument:
<state>: 0(disable), 1(enable).
Possible value:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<state>: 0(disable), 1(enable).
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set igmpsnp-enable 0
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-setting
IGMP Snooping
: Disable
: Enable
: 20
Unregister Multicast Flooding
General Query Interval
General Query Max Response Time : 5
General Query Timeout
Specific Query Count
: 15
: 2
Specific Query Max Response Time : 1
Specific Query Timeout : 2
Port Multicast Group Limit IGMP Router
---- --------------------- -----------
1
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
55
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
v
v
v
11
55
12
55
...(q to quit)
set igmp-router
Syntax:
set igmp-router <port> <state>
Description:
To set igmp router port
Argument:
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value.
<state>: 0(non-router), 1(router).
Possible value:
<port> : 1 to 26.
<state>: 0(non-router), 1(router).
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set igmp-router 5-7 1
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-setting
IGMP Snooping
: Enable
: Enable
: 20
Unregister Multicast Flooding
General Query Interval
General Query Max Response Time : 5
General Query Timeout
Specific Query Count
: 15
: 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specific Query Max Response Time : 1
Specific Query Timeout : 2
Port Multicast Group Limit IGMP Router
---- --------------------- -----------
1
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
55
2
3
4
5
v
v
v
6
7
8
9
10
v
v
v
11
55
12
55
...(q to quit)
set mvr-enable
Syntax:
set mvr-enable <state> <mvid>
Description:
To set igmp router port
Argument:
<state>: 0(disable), 1(enable).
<mvid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
When set mvr to enable mode, this option is necessary.
Possible value:
<state>: 0(disable), 1(enable).
<mvid>: 1 to 4094.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set mvr-enable 1 3
set mvr-tagging
Syntax:
set mvr-tagging <port> <state>
Description:
To set mvr tagging function on switch
Argument:
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value.
<state>: 0(untag-out), 1(tag-out).
Possible value:
<port> : 1 to 26.
<state>: 0(untag-out), 1(tag-out)
Example:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set mvr-tagging 8-10 1
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show mvr-setting
Multicast VLAN Registration : Enable
MMulticast VLAN ID
: 0
Port Service Type Tagging
---- ------------ -------
1
2
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
3
4
5
6
7
8
v
v
v
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
...(q to quit)
set mvr-vid
Syntax:
set mvr-vid <vid>
Description:
To set mvr vid on switch
Argument:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value
Possible value:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set mvr-vid 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set mvrserv-type
Syntax:
set mvrserv-type <port> <type>
Description:
To set mvr service type
Argument:
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, from 1 to 26 value.
<type>: 0(None), 1(Client), 2(Router).
Possible value:
<port> : 1 to 26.
<type>: 0(None), 1(Client), 2(Router).
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set mvrserv-type 6-8 1
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set mvrserv-type 9-10 2
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show mvr-setting
Multicast VLAN Registration : Enable
MMulticast VLAN ID
: 0
Port Service Type Tagging
---- ------------ -------
1
2
None
None
3
None
4
None
5
None
6
Client
Client
Client
Router
Router
None
7
8
v
v
v
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
...(q to quit)
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set specqry-count
Syntax:
set specqry-count <cnt>
Description:
To set specific query count function on switch
Argument:
<cnt>: from 1 to 10 value.
Possible value:
<cnt>: from 1 to 10 value.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set specqry-count 5
set specqry-response
Syntax:
set specqry-response <time>
Description:
To set specific query max response time on switch.
Argument:
<time>: from 1 to 10 value.
Possible value:
<time>: 1 to 10.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set specqry-response 2
Specific Query Max Response Time must less than Specific Query Timeout
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set specqry-response 1
set specqry-timeout
Syntax:
set specqry-timeout <time>
Description:
To set specific query timeout on switch.
Argument:
<time>: from 1 to 30 value.
Possible value:
<time>: 1 to 30.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# set specqry-timeout 20
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-setting
IGMP Snooping
: Enable
: Enable
: 20
Unregister Multicast Flooding
General Query Interval
General Query Max Response Time : 5
General Query Timeout
Specific Query Count
: 15
: 5
Specific Query Max Response Time : 1
Specific Query Timeout
: 20
Port Multicast Group Limit IGMP Router
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
---- --------------------- -----------
1
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
55
2
3
4
5
v
v
v
6
7
8
9
10
v
v
v
11
55
12
55
...(q to quit)
show group-filtering
Syntax:
show group-filtering <vid>
Description:
To show group filtering on switch.
Argument:
<vid>: from 1 to 4094 value.
Possible value:
<vid>: 1 to 4094.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show group-filtering 3
Index : 1
Start Address : 224.1.1.1
End Address : 226.255.255.255
Port Member : 10,11
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)#
show igmp-setting
Syntax:
show igmp-setting
Description:
To show igmp-setting on switch.
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-setting
IGMP Snooping
: Enable
: Enable
Unregister Multicast Flooding
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Query Interval
: 20
General Query Max Response Time : 5
General Query Timeout
Specific Query Count
: 15
: 5
Specific Query Max Response Time : 1
Specific Query Timeout
: 20
Port Multicast Group Limit IGMP Router
---- --------------------- -----------
1
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
55
2
3
4
5
v
v
v
6
7
8
9
10
v
v
v
11
55
12
55
...(q to quit)
show igmp-vlan
Syntax:
show igmp-vlan
Description:
To show igmp-vlan on switch.
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show igmp-vlan
Index
VID
----- -------
1
2
1
3
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)#
show multicast-status
Syntax:
show multicast-status
Description:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show multicast-status on switch.
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show multicast-status ?
None entry exist.
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)#
show mvr-setting
Syntax:
show mvr-setting
Description:
To show mvr-setting on switch.
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(multicast)# show mvr-setting
Multicast VLAN Registration : Enable
MMulticast VLAN ID
: 0
Port Service Type Tagging
---- ------------ -------
1
2
None
None
3
None
4
None
5
None
6
Client
Client
Client
Router
Router
None
7
8
v
v
v
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
...(q to quit)
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢂIP
disable dhcp
Syntax:
disable dhcp
Description:
To disable the DHCP function of the system.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(ip)# disable dhcp
DHCP is already stopped.
enable dhcp
Syntax:
enable dhcp <manual | auto>
Description:
To enable the system DHCP function and set DNS server via manual or auto mode.
Argument:
<manual|auto> : set DNS by using manual or auto mode.
Possible value:
<manual|auto> : manual or auto
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(ip)# enable dhcp manual
set dns
Syntax:
set dns <ip>
Description:
To set the IP address of DNS server.
Argument:
<ip> : dns ip address
Possible value:
<ip> : 168.95.1.1
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (ip)# set dns 168.95.1.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set ip
Syntax:
set ip <ip> <mask> <gateway>
Description:
To set the system IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
Argument:
<ip> : ip address
<mask> : subnet mask
<gateway> : default gateway
Possible value:
<ip> : 192.168.1.1 or others
<mask> : 255.255.255.0 or others
<gateway> : 192.168.1.253 or others
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (ip)# set ip 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253
FEL2P-SW26(ip)# show
DHCP
: Disable
IP Address
Subnet mask
Gateway
: 192.168.1.2
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.168.1.253
Current IP Address : 192.168.1.10
Current Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Current Gateway
DNS Setting
DNS Server
: 192.168.1.254
: Manual
: 0.0.0.0
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the system’s DHCP function state, IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway, DNS mode, DNS server IP address and current IP address.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(ip)# show
DHCP
: Disable
IP Address
Subnet mask
Gateway
: 192.168.1.2
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.168.1.253
Current IP Address : 192.168.1.10
Current Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Current Gateway
DNS Setting
DNS Server
: 192.168.1.254
: Manual
: 0.0.0.0
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢂlog
clear
Syntax:
clear
Description:
To clear the log data.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (log)# clear
disable auto-upload
Syntax:
disable auto-upload
Description:
To disable the auto-upload function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (log)# disable auto-upload
enable auto-upload
Syntax:
enable auto-upload
Description:
To enable the auto-upload function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (log)# enable auto-upload
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To show a list of trap log events. When any of log events happens, it will be
recorded and using show command in log function to query. Up to 120 log records
are supported.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(log)# show
Tftp Server : 192.168.2.2
Auto Upload : Enable
1) Thu Apr 03 14:45:17 2008 Login [admin]
2) Thu Apr 03 14:43:59 2008 Link Up [Port 7]
3) Thu Apr 03 14:43:56 2008 Link Down [Port 7]
4) Thu Apr 03 14:15:03 2008 Logout [admin]
5) Thu Apr 03 13:06:07 2008 Login [admin]
6) Thu Apr 03 13:05:15 2008 Warm Start
FEL2P-SW26(log)#
upload
Syntax:
Upload
Description:
To upload log data through tftp.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (log)# upload
Publication date: March., 2011
225
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢂLLDP
<<set clear>>
set
Syntax:
set clear
Description:
Resets the traffic and error counters to zero.
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set clear
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
set mode
Syntax:
set mode <mode> <range>
Description:
To set LLDP mode
Argument:
tx and rx = 1
tx only = 2
rx only = 3
disabled = 0
port range syntax : 1,5-7, available from 1 to 27
Possible value:
<Port range> : 1 to 10, <mode>: 0-3
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set mode 1 5
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
set notification
Syntax:
set notification <state> <range>
Description:
To set LLDP notification
Argument:
enable = 1
disable = 2
Possible value:
<Port range> : syntax : 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26, <state>: 1, 2
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set notification 1 5
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set reInitDelay
Syntax:
set reInitDelay <time>
Description:
To set LLDP reInitDelay time
Argument:
<Time> : from 1 to 10 second(s)
Possible value:
<Time> : from 1 to 10 second(s)
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set reInitDelay 5
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
set tlv
Syntax:
set tlv <0> <1> <2> <3> <4> <range>
Description:
To set disable/enable lldp tlv
Argument:
Port Description: bit 0
System Name:
bit 1
System Description: bit 2
System Capabilities: bit 3
Management Address: bit 4
port range syntax : 1,5-7, available from 1 to 10, <Port Description>: 0/1, <System
Name> :0/1, <System Description> : 0/1, < System Capabilities>: 0/1, <
Management Address>: 0/1
Possible value:
<Port Range> : syntax : 1,5-7, available from 1 to 10
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set tlv 1 1 1 1 1 1-10
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
set txDelay
Syntax:
set txDelay <time>
Description:
To set lldp txdelay
Argument:
<time>: from 1 to 8192 second(s)
Possible value:
<time>: from 1 to 8192 second(s)
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set txDelay 500
Publication date: March., 2011
227
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
set txHold
Syntax:
set txHold <time>
Description:
To set lldp txHold
Argument:
<time>: from 2 to 10 second(s)
Possible value:
<time>: from 2 to 10 second(s)
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set txHold 5
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
set txInterval
Syntax:
set txInterval <time>
Description:
To set lldp txInterval
Argument:
<time>: from 5 to 32768 second(s)
Possible value:
<time>: from 5 to 32768 second(s)
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# set txInterval 5
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
show config
Syntax:
Show config
Description:
To display LLDP Configuration
Argument:
None
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# show config
LLDP Global Configuation
LLDP Transmit Interval
[30] : 5
LLDP Hold time Multiplier [4] : 5
LLDP Delay Interval
LLDP Reinit Interval
[2] : 1
[2] : 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LLDP Notification Interval [5] : 500
LLDP Port Configuation
Port AdminStatus NotificationEnabled
---- ----------- -------------------
1
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
False
False
False
False
True
3
4
5
6
False
False
False
False
False
7
8
9
10
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
show detail counter
Syntax:
show detail-counter <port>
Description:
To display LLDP detail counter
Argument:
<port>: 1,5-9, available from 1 to 10
Possible value:
<port>: 1,5-9, available from 1 to 10
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# show detail-counter 15
LLDP Port Statistics Detail
Port Name : 15
Frames Discarded : 0
Frames Invalid
Frames REceived : 0
Frames Sent : 0
TLVs Unrecognized : 0
TLVs Discard : 0
: 0
Neighbor Ageouts : 0
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
show local-device
Syntax:
show local-device
Description:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To display LLDP local device
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# show local-device
LLDP Local Devices Information
Chassis Type : MAC-address
Chassis Id : 00-A0-57-15-2A-F7
System name = FEL2P-SW26
System Description : 24-Port FEL2 Plus Managed Switch with 2 SFP Dual
Media
System Capabilities Supported : bridge
System Capabilities Enabled : bridge
Management Address :
Type : ipv4
Address : 192 . 168. 20 . 15
LLDP Port Information
Port
| PortType PortId PortDesc
-------- + --------- ------ --------
1
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
local
local
local
local
local
local
local
local
local
local
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Port #1
Port #2
Port #3
Port #4
Port #5
Port #6
Port #7
Port #8
Port #9
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10 Port #10
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
show Neighbor
Syntax:
show neighbor <port>
Description:
To display LLDPneighbor
Argument:
<port>: 1,5-9, available from 1 to 26.
Possible value:
<port>: 1,5-9, available from 1 to 26.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# show Neighbor 1
LLDP Remote Devices Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
show port-config
Syntax:
show port-config <port>
Description:
To display LLDPport config
Argument:
<port>: 1,5-9, available from 1 to 26.
Possible value:
<port>: 1,5-9, available from 1 to 26.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# show port-config 5
LLDP Port Configuration Detail
Port : 5
AdminStatus [Tx_Rx] : Disable
NotificationEnabled [False] : True
TLVs Advertised :
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
show stats
Syntax:
show stats
Description:
To display LLDP stats
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)# show stats
LLDP Device Statistics
Neighbor Entries List Last Updated : 5850 sec. ago
New Neighbor Entries Count
: 0
Neighbor Entries Deleted Count : 0
Neighbor Entries Dropped Count : 0
Neighbor Entries AgeOut Count : 0
LLDP Port Statistics
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx
TLV
TLV
Port Frames Frames Errors Discards Discards Unknown Aged
-
--- ------ ------ ------ -------- -------- ------- -----
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
..
...
..........
........ .........................
FEL2P-SW26(lldp)#
ꢂmac-table
<<alias>>
del
Syntax:
del <mac>
Description:
To delete the mac alias entry.
Argument:
<mac> : mac address, format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
Possible value:
<mac> : mac address
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-alias)# del 00-e5-55-c9-93-c9
set
Syntax:
set <mac> <alias>
Description:
To set up the mac alias entry.
Argument:
<mac> : mac address, format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
<alias> : mac alias name, max. 15 characters
Possible value:
<mac> : mac address
<alias> : max. 15 characters
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-alias)# set 00-d0-59-c5-92-c8 client1
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the mac alias entry.
Argument:
None.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-alias)# show
MAC Alias List
MAC Address
Alias
----- ----------------- ----------------
1)
2)
00-d0-59-c5-92-c8 client1
00-e5-55-c9-93-c9 client2
<<information>>
search
Syntax:
search <port> <mac> <vid>
Description:
To look for the relative mac information in mac table.
Argument:
<port> : set up the range of the ports to search for,
syntax 1,5-7, available form 1 to 26
<mac> : mac address, format: 01-02-03-04-05-06, '?' can be used
<vid> : vlan id, from 1 to 4094; '?' as don't care, 0 as untagged
Possible value:
<port> : 1 to 26
<vid> : 0, 1 ~4094
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-information)# search 7 00-d0-59-c5-92-c8 1
MAC Table List
Alias
---------------- ----------------- ---- ---- -----------------
client1 00-D0-59-C5-92-C8 1 Dynamic
MAC Address
Port VID State
7
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-information)#
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display all mac table information.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (mac-table-information)# show
MAC Table List
Alias
MAC Address
Port VID State
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
---------------- ----------------------- ---- ---- -----------------
00-C0-26-C3-3F-37
00-C0-9F-71-12-24
00-D0-59-C5-92-C8
00-E0-18-6C-9E-DA
00-E0-18-DF-91-DD
52-54-4C-39-3A-38
1
1
7
1
1
1
1 Dynamic
1 Dynamic
1 Dynamic
1 Dynamic
1 Dynamic
1 Dynamic
client2
<<maintain>>
flush
Syntax:
flush
Description:
To flush MAC table.
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-maintain)# flush
set aging
Syntax:
set aging <time>
Description:
To set up the age out time of dynamic learning mac.
Argument:
<time> : Mac table age out time between 10 and 1000000 seconds
set time to 0 as disable age out time
Possible value:
<time> : 10-1000000 seconds or 0
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-maintain)# set aging 300
set learning
Syntax:
set learning <port> <num>
Description:
To set up the maximum amount of MAC that each port can learn.
Argument:
<port> syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<num> : MAC address numbers which can be dynamically learned
num range: between 0 to 8191; 0 for learning disabled
Possible value:
<port> : 1 to 26
<num>: 0 to 8191
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (mac-table-maintain)# set learning 5 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the settings of MAC table ageout time and the learning limit of each port.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-maintain)# show
Mac table ageout time: 300 seconds
Port Dynamically learn limit
------ -------------------------
1
2
3
4
5
8191
8191
8191
8191
8191
:
:
:
21
22
23
24
25
26
8191
8191
8191
8191
8192
8192
<<port-security>>
disable
Syntax:
disable
Description:
To disable port security.
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security)# disable
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
enable
Syntax:
enable
Description:
To enable port security.
Argument:
none
Possible value:
none
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security)# enable
<<port>>
Syntax:
port <range>
Description:
To enter into per port static mac mode.
Argument:
<range> : syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<range> : 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security)# port 10
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security-port-10)#
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security-port-10)# add 00-d0-59-c5-92-c8 2
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security-port-10)# show
Port 10 static mac entry:
-------------------------------------
No MAC Address
VID
1 00-D0-59-C5-92-C8 2
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security-port-10)# del 00-d0-59-c5-92-c8
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security-port-10)# show
Port 10 static mac entry:
--------------------------------------------
(None)
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-port-security-port-10)#
<<static-mac>>
add
Syntax:
add <mac> <vid> <rule> <port>
Description:
To add the static mac entry.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Argument:
<mac>: mac address, format: 01-02-03-04-05-06
<vid>: vlan id, from 1 to 4094
<rule> : forwarding rule, from 0 to 2
0:static
1:drop destination address matches
2:drop source address matches
<port> : forwarded destination port, form 1 to 26
Possible value:
<vid>: 1 to 4094
<rule>: 0 to 2
<port>: 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)# add 00-d0-59-c5-92-c8 1 1 8
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)# show
MAC
VID
Forwarding Rule
Port
------ ----------------- ------ ----------------------------- -------
1) 00-D0-59-C5-92-C8
1 Static with Destination Drop
8
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)#
del
Syntax:
del <mac>
Description:
To remove the static mac entry.
Argument:
<mac> : mac address, format: 00-02-03-04-05-06
Possible value:
<mac> : mac address
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)# del 00-d0-59-c5-92-c8
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)# show
MAC
VID
Forwarding Rule
Port
------ ----------------- ------ ----------------------------- -------
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)#
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display static mac entry.
Argument:
None.
Publication date: March., 2011
237
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)# add 00-d0-59-c5-92-c8 1 1 8
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)# show
MAC
------ ----------------- ------ ----------------------------- -------
1) 00-D0-59-C5-92-C8 1 Static with Destination Drop
VID
Forwarding Rule
Port
8
FEL2P-SW26(mac-table-static-mac)#
ꢂmanagement
del
Syntax:
del <name>
Description:
To delete a management security entry
Argument:
<name> : management security entry name
Possible value:
<name> : management security entry name
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(management-add)# set name Mary vid 20 ip 192.168.1.1-
192.168.1.90 port 2-5,8 type h,s action a
set access
Syntax:
set access <name> <range>
Description:
To setup access type field of a management security entry
Argument:
<name> : management security entry name
<range> syntax: 1,1-3, available from 0 to 3
1 - Http
2 - Telnet
3 - Snmp
0 - Any
Possible value:
<name> : management security entry name
<range> syntax: 1,1-3, available from 0 to 3
1 - Http
2 - Telnet
3 - Snmp
0 - Any
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(management)# set access acc2 1-3
FEL2P-SW26(management)# show
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1):
Name
VID
: acc1
: 2
IP Range: 192.168.2.2-192.168.2.22
Port : 10
Access : Any
Action : Accept
2):
Name
VID
: acc2
: Any
IP Range: Any
Port : Any
Access : Http Telnet SNMP
Action : Deny
FEL2P-SW26(management)#
set action
Syntax:
set action <name> <act>
Description:
To setup action field of a management security entry
Argument:
<name> : management security entry name
<act> : 0 for deny, 1 for accept
Possible value:
<name> : management security entry name
<act> : 0 for deny, 1 for accept
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(management)# set action acc2 0
FEL2P-SW26(management)# show
1):
Name
VID
: acc1
: 2
IP Range: 192.168.2.2-192.168.2.22
Port : 10
Access : Any
Action : Accept
2):
Name
VID
: acc2
: Any
IP Range: Any
Port : Any
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Access : Http Telnet SNMP
Action : Deny
FEL2P-SW26(management)#
set ip
Syntax:
set ip <name> <ip1> <ip2>
Description:
To setup ip field of a management security entry
Argument:
<name> : management security entry name
<ip1> : start ip address, 0 for any
<ip2> : end ip address
Possible value:
<name> : management security entry name
<ip1> : start ip address, 0 for any
<ip2> : end ip address
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(management)# set ip remote1 192.168.2.33 192.168.2.34
FEL2P-SW26(management)# show
1):
Name
VID
: remote1
: Any
IP Range: 192.168.2.33-192.168.2.34
Port : Any
Access : Any
Action : Deny
FEL2P-SW26(management)#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set port
Syntax:
set port <name> <range>
Description:
To setup port field of a management security entry
Argument:
<name> : management security entry name
<range syntax> : 1,5-7, available from 0 to 26, 0 for any
Possible value:
<name> : management security entry name
<range syntax> : 1,5-7, available from 0 to 26, 0 for any
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(management)# set port remote1 9
FEL2P-SW26(management)# show
1):
Name
VID
: remote1
: Any
IP Range: 192.168.2.33-192.168.2.34
Port : 9
Access : Any
Action : Deny
FEL2P-SW26(management)#
set vid
Syntax:
set vid <name> <vid>
Description:
To setup vid field of a management security entry
Argument:
<name> : management security entry name
<vid> : 0 for any, or 1 to 4094
Possible value:
<name> : management security entry name
<vid> : 0 for any, or 1 to 4094
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(management)# set vid remote1 300
FEL2P-SW26(management)# show
1):
Name
VID
: remote1
: 300
IP Range: 192.168.2.33-192.168.2.34
Port : 9
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Access : Any
Action : Deny
FEL2P-SW26(management)#
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To show management security entry.
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(management)# show
1):
Name
VID
: remote1
: 300
IP Range: 192.168.2.33-192.168.2.34
Port : 9
Access : Any
Action : Deny
FEL2P-SW26(management)#
ꢂport
clear counter
Syntax:
clear counter
Description:
To clear all ports’ counter (include simple and detail port counter) information.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (port)# clear counter
disable state
Syntax:
disable state <range>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description:
To disable the communication capability of the port.
Argument:
<range>: port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<range>: 1 ~ 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (port)# disable state 12
enable state
Syntax:
enable state <range>
Description:
To enable the communication capability of the port.
Argument:
<range>: port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<range>: 1 ~ 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (port)# enable state 3-10
set description
Syntax:
set description <range> <description>
Description:
To set up the flow control function of all ports.
Argument:
<range> syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<description> : set its port description, max 47 characters
Possible value:
<range> : 1 to 26
<description> : set its port description, max 47 characters
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(port)# set description 6 Engineer
FEL2P-SW26(port)# show description
Port Description
------------------:-0D-61-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RDTeam
Engineer
sales
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
10
11
12
13
……
set flow-control
Syntax:
set flow-control <range> <symmetric | asymmetric>
Description:
To set up the flow control function of all ports.
Argument:
<range>:port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<symmetric>: set its flow control as symmetric
<asymmetric>: set its flow control as asymmetric
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<symmetric | asymmetric>:symmetric or asymmetric
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (port)# set flow-control 3-6 asymmetric
set speed-duplex
Syntax:
set speed-duplex <range> <auto>|[<10|100|1000> <half | full>]
Description:
To set up the speed and duplex of all ports.
Argument:
<range>:port range, syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<port-speed>:
auto : set auto-negotiation mode
10 : set speed to 10M
100 : set speed to 100M
1000 : set speed to 1000M
<port-duplex> :
half : set to half duplex
full : set to full duplex
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
<port-speed> : auto, 10, 100, 1000
<port-duplex> : full, half
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(port)# set speed-duplex 10-15 10 full
FEL2P-SW26(port)# show status
asymmetric: set
5 TP
Up Enable Enable 100M/Full
ON
----
----
----
OFF
----
----
----
6 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
7 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
8 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
Engineer
sales
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
10 TP Down Enable Disable ----/----
----
----
ON
----
----
ON
11 TP
Up Enable Disable 100M/Half
12 TP Down Enable Disable ----/----
13 TP Down Enable Disable ----/----
14 TP Down Enable Disable ----/----
15 TP Down Enable Disable ----/----
16 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
……
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
…….
25 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
26 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
----
----
----
----
FEL2P-SW26(port)#
show conf
Syntax:
show conf
Description:
To display the each port’s configuration about state, speed-duplex and flow control.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (port)# show conf
…….
…….
3 Enable Auto Mode
4 Enable Auto Mode
5 Enable Auto Mode
6 Enable Auto Mode
7 Enable Auto Mode
8 Enable Auto Mode
9 Enable Auto Mode
Symmetrictem
Symmetricto security mode
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
Asymmetric
Symmetric
10 Enable
11 Enable
12 Enable
13 Enable
14 Enable
15 Enable
10M/Full
10M/Full
10M/Full
10M/Full
10M/Full
10M/Full
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
16 Enable Auto Mode
17 Enable Auto Mode
18 Enable Auto Mode
19 Enable Auto Mode
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 Enable Auto Mode
21 Enable Auto Mode
22 Enable Auto Mode
23 Enable Auto Mode
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
Symmetric
show detail-counter
Syntax:
show detail-counter <#>
Description:
To display the detailed counting number of each port’s traffic.
Argument:
<#> : port, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<#>:1 ~ 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (port)# show detail-counter 6
FEL2P-SW26(port)# show detail-counter 1
Receive Total:
-------------------------------------------------------
Rx Packets
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
61731
54949069
0
Rx Octets
Rx Errors
Rx Unicast Packets
Rx Broadcast Packets
Rx Multicast Packets
Rx Pause Packets
42150
12752
6829
0
Receive Size Counters:
-------------------------------------------------------
Rx Undersize Packets
Rx Oversize Packets
:
:
0
0
Receive Error Counters:
-------------------------------------------------------
Rx FCS Errors
Rx Alignment Errors
Rx Fragments
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
Rx Jabbers
Rx Drop Packets
..(q to quit)
show media
Syntax:
show media <port>
Description:
To display the module 25 or 26 information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Argument:
<port>: available 25, 26
Possible value:
<port>: 25, 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(port)# show media 25
Port 25 Fiber Media Information
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Connector Type
Fiber Type
: SFP - Unknown or unspecified
: Reserved
Tx Central Wavelength : 0
Baud Rate
: 1G
Vendor OUI
Vendor Name
Vendor PN
: 00:00:00
: FIBERXON INC.
: FTM-C012R-LC
: 10
Vendor Rev
Vendor SN
: PP220052901281
: 051012
Date Code
Temperature
Vcc
: none
: none
Mon1 (Bias) mA
Mon2 (TX PWR)
Mon3 (RX PWR)
: none
: none
: none
FEL2P-SW26(port)#
show simple-counter
Syntax:
show simple-counter
Description:
To display the summary counting of each port’s traffic.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (port)# show simple-counter
Port 1
Tx Octets
: 2346780
: 28884
Rx Octets : 57965158
Rx Packets : 65171
Rx Errors : 0
Tx Packets
Tx Collisions : 0
Port 2
Tx Octets
: 0
: 0
Rx Octets : 0
Rx Packets : 0
Rx Errors : 0
Tx Packets
Tx Collisions : 0
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Port 3
Tx Octets
Tx Packets
: 0
: 0
Rx Octets : 0
Rx Packets : 0
Rx Errors : 0
Tx Collisions : 0
…
…
...(q to quit)
show status
Syntax:
show status
Description:
To display the port’s current status.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(port)# show status
Port Media Link State Auto Nego. Speed/Duplex Rx Pause Tx Pause
---- ----- ---- ------- ---------- ------------ -------- --------
1 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
2 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
3 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
4 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
----
----
----
----
ON
----
----
----
----
ON
5 TP
Up Enable Enable 100M/Full
6 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
----
----
----
----
7 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
:
:
:
24 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
25 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
26 TP Down Enable Enable ----/----
----
----
----
----
----
----
ꢂqos
disable 1p
Syntax:
disable 1p
Description:
To disable 802.1p qos.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# disable 1p
disable dscp
Syntax:
disable dscp
Description:
To disable IP DSCP qos.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# disable dscp
disable qos
Syntax:
disable qos
Description:
To disable qos function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# disable qos
enable 1p
Syntax:
enable 1p
Description:
To enable 802.1p qos.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# enable 1p
enable dscp
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syntax:
enable dscp
Description:
To enable IP DSCP qos.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# enable dscp
enable qos
Syntax:
enable qos
Description:
To enable qos function.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# enable qos
enable tos
Syntax:
enable tos
Description:
To enable IP TOS qos.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# enable tos
set dscp
Syntax:
set dscp [<q0><priority>] [<q1><priority>] [<q2><priority>] [<q3><priority>]
Description:
To set IP DSCP qos weighting for 4 queues.
Argument:
<q>:
queue level, q0: queue 0; q1: queue 1; q2: queue 2; q3: queue 3
<priority>: priority level. One queue has been assigned 2 different priorities.
You don't need to use all of queues, but must assign queues in order
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
syntax: 1,2 or 2,5-7, available from 0 to 63.
Possible value:
<priority>: 0 to 63
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# set dscp q0 2 q1 2 q2 2 q3 3
set pri-tag
Syntax:
set pri-tag [<q0><priority>] [<q1><priority>] [<q2><priority>] [<q3><priority>]
Description:
To set 802.1p qos weighting for 4 queues.
Argument:
<q>:
queue level, q0: queue 0; q1: queue 1; q2: queue 2; q3: queue 3.
<priority>: priority level. One queue has been assigned 2 different priorities.
You don't need to use all of queues, but must assign queues in order.
Syntax: 1,2 or 2,5-7, available from 0 to 7.
Possible value:
<priority>: 0 to 7.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(qos)# set pri-tag q0 0 q1 1 q2 2 q3 3
FEL2P-SW26(qos)# show priority-tag
802.1p priority
====================
Global QoS mode: Enable QoS
Enable 802.1p Priority
Enable ip diffserv classification
Scheduling:
weight:
4 WRR method.
wrr 0 = 1; wrr 1 = 2; wrr 2 = 4; wrr 3 = 8.
weighted range: 1~55.
P0~7:
Priority 0~7.
Default mode:
P6,P7.
Queue0: P0,P1; Queue1: P2,P3; Queue2: P4,P5; Queue3:
P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Queue 0
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
FEL2P-SW26(qos)#
set sche
Syntax:
set sche <wrr|strict> <wrr_0> <wrr_1> <wrr_2> <wrr_3>
Description:
To setup scheduling methods or weight.
Argument:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
method : priority scheduling method
0: 4 WRR
1: 1 Strict + 3 WRR
2: 2 Strict + 2 WRR
3: 4 Strict
wrr_0 to 3: weighted for every queue. weighted range : 1-55.
Possible value:
<method>: 0-3
<wrr_0 to 3>: 1-55.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(qos)# set sche 0 2 8 11 11
FEL2P-SW26(qos)# show pr
802.1p priority
====================
Global QoS mode: Enable QoS
Enable 802.1p Priority
Enable ip diffserv classification
Scheduling:
weight:
4 WRR method.
wrr 0 = 2; wrr 1 = 8; wrr 2 = 11; wrr 3 = 11.
weighted range: 1~55.
P0~7:
Priority 0~7.
Default mode:
P6,P7.
Queue0: P0,P1; Queue1: P2,P3; Queue2: P4,P5; Queue3:
P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Queue 0
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
FEL2P-SW26(qos)#
Possible value:
show dscp
Syntax:
show dscp
Description:
To show IP DSCP Qos configuration.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# show dscp
ip diffserv classification
====================
Global QoS mode: Enable QoS
Disable 802.1p Priority
Disable ip tos classification
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enable ip diffserv classification
weighted round robin method.
Scheduling:
weight:
wrr 0 = 1; wrr 1 = 1; wrr 2 = 8; wrr 3 = 16.
weighted range: 1~55.
P0~63:
Priority 0~63.
Default mode:
P48~63.
Queue0: P0~15; Queue1: P16~31; Queue2: P32~47; Queue3:
DiffServ Queue DiffServ Queue DiffServ Queue DiffServ Queue
--------- ------- ---------- ------- ---------- ------- ---------- -------
0
4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
8
9
10
14
18
22
26
30
34
38
42
46
50
54
58
62
11
15
19
23
27
31
35
39
43
47
51
55
59
63
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
13
17
21
25
29
33
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
show priority-tag
Syntax:
show priority-tag
Description:
To show 802.1p Qos configuration.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (qos)# show priority-tag
802.1p priority
====================
Global QoS mode: Enable QoS
Enable 802.1p Priority
Enable ip diffserv classification
4 WRR method.
Scheduling:
weight:
wrr 0 = 2; wrr 1 = 8; wrr 2 = 11; wrr 3 = 11.
weighted range: 1~55.
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P0~7:
Priority 0~7.
Default mode:
P6,P7.
Queue0: P0,P1; Queue1: P2,P3; Queue2: P4,P5; Queue3:
P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Queue 0
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
FEL2P-SW26(qos)#
ꢂreboot
reboot
Syntax:
reboot
Description:
To reboot the system.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 # reboot
ꢂsecurity
<<isolated-group>>
set
Syntax:
set <port>
Description:
To set up the function of the isolated group.
Argument:
<port> : isolated port; range syntax: 1,5-7, available from 0 to 26
set 0 as disabled
Possible value:
<port>:0 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(security-isolated-group)# set 9,10-14
FEL2P-SW26(security-isolated-group)# show
Isolated group:
9 10 11 12 13 14
FEL2P-SW26(security-isolated-group)#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the current setting status of isolated group.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(security-isolated-group)# set 9,10-14
FEL2P-SW26(security-isolated-group)# show
Isolated group:
9 10 11 12 13 14
FEL2P-SW26(security-isolated-group)#
<<mirror>>
disable
Syntax:
disable
Description:
To disable the function of mirror.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (security-mirror)# disable
enable
Syntax:
enable
Description:
To enable the function of mirror.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (security-mirror)# enable
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set
Syntax:
set <spy> <ingress> <egress>
Description:
To set up the monitoring port and monitored ports of the mirror (ingress/egress)
function. User can monitor the ports that receive or transmit the packets.
Argument:
<spy> : Monitoring port
<ingress> : monitored ingress port; range syntax: 1,5-7, available from 0 to 26
<egress> : monitored egress port; range syntax: 1,5-7, available from 0 to 26
set ingress/egress to 0 as ingress/egress disabled
Possible value:
<ingress>: 0 to 26
<egress>: 0 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(security-mirror)# set 9 1-10 1-10
FEL2P-SW26(security-mirror)# show
Mirror:
Monitoring Port :9
Monitored Ingress :
Monitored Egress :
FEL2P-SW26(security-mirror)#
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the current setting status of mirror.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (security-mirror)# show
Mirror:
Monitoring Port :1
Monitored Ingress :4
Monitored Egress :2 3
ꢂsnmp
disable
Syntax:
disable set-community
disable snmp
Description:
The Disable here is used for the de-activation of snmp or set-community.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(snmp)# disable set-community
FEL2P-SW26(snmp)# disable snmp
enable
Syntax:
enable set-community
enable snmp
Description:
The Enable here is used for the activation snmp or set-community.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(snmp)# enable set-community
FEL2P-SW26(snmp)# enable snmp
set
Syntax:
set get-community <community>
set set-community <community>
set trap <#> <ip> [port] [community]
Description:
The Set here is used for the setup of get-community, set-community, trap host ip,
host port and trap- community.
Argument:
<#>: trap number, range: 1 to 6
<ip>: ip address or domain name
<port>: trap port
<community>: community name
Possible value:
<trap number> : 1 to 6
<port> :1~65535
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (snmp)# set get-community public
FEL2P-SW26 (snmp)# set set-community private
FEL2P-SW26 (snmp)# set trap 1 192.168.1.1 162 public
show
Syntax:
show
Publication date: March., 2011
257
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description:
The Show here is to display the configuration of SNMP.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (snmp)# show
SNMP
: Enable
Get Community: public
Set Community: private [Enable]
Trap Host 1 IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Port: 162 Community: public
Trap Host 2 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public
Trap Host 3 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public
Trap Host 4 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public
Trap Host 5 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public
Trap Host 6 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public
ꢂstp
MCheck
Syntax:
MCheck <range>
Description:
To force the port to transmit RST BPDUs.
Argument:
<range>: syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# Mcheck 1-8
disable
Syntax:
disable
Description:
To disable the function of STP.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# disable
enable
Syntax:
enable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description:
To enable the function of STP.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# enable
set config
Syntax:
set config <Bridge Priority> <Hello Time> <Max. Age> <Forward Delay>
Description:
To set up the parameters of STP.
Argument:
<Bridge Priority>: priority must be a multiple of 4096,available from 0 to 61440.
<Hello Time>: available from 1 to 10.
<Max. Age>: available from 6 to 40.
<Forward Delay>: available from 4 to 30.
Note: 2*(Forward Delay -1) >= Max Age
Max Age >= 2*(Hello Time +1)
Possible value:
<Bridge Priority>: 0 to 61440.
<Hello Time>: 1 to 10.
<Max. Age>: 6 to 40.
<Forward Delay>: 4 to 30.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# set config 61440 2 20 15
set port
Syntax:
set port <range> <path cost> <priority> <edge_port> <admin p2p>
Description:
To set up the port information of STP.
Argument:
<range>: syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<path cost>: 0, 1-200000000. The value zero means auto status
<priority>: priority must be a multiple of 16, available from 0 to 240
<edge_port>: Admin Edge Port, <yes|no>
<admin p2p>: Admin point to point, <auto|true|false>
Possible value:
<range> :1 to 26
<path cost>: 0, 1-200000000.
<edge_port> : yes / no
<priority> : 0 to 240
<admin p2p>: auto / true / false
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# set port 1-16 0 128 yes auto
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set version
Syntax:
set version <stp|rstp>
Description:
To set up the version of STP.
Argument:
<stp|rstp>:stp / rstp
Possible value:
<stp|rstp>:stp / rstp
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# set version rstp
show config
Syntax:
show config
Description:
To display the STP configuration data.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# show config
STP State Configuration :
Spanning Tree Protocol
: Enabled
Bridge Priority (0-61440) : 61440
Hello Time (1-10 sec)
Max. Age (6-40 sec)
: 2
: 20
Forward Delay (4-30 sec) : 15
Force Version
: RSTP
show port
Syntax:
show port
Description:
To display the port information of STP.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# show port
Port Port Status Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Port Admin Point To Point
==== =========== ========= ======== =============== ====================
1 DISCARDING
2 DISCARDING
3 DISCARDING
2000000
2000000
2000000
128
128
128
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto
Auto
Auto
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 DISCARDING
5 DISCARDING
2000000
2000000
:
128
128
Yes
Yes
Auto
Auto
:
:
23 DISCARDING
24 DISCARDING
25 DISCARDING
26 DISCARDING
200000
200000
20000
20000
128
128
128
128
No
No
No
No
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
show status
Syntax:
show status
Description:
To display of the status of STP.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (stp)# show status
STP Status :
STP State
: Enabled
Bridge ID
: 00:40:C7:D8:09:1D
Bridge Priority
Designated Root
Designated Priority
Root Port
: 61440
: 00:40:C7:D8:09:1D
: 61440
: 0
Root Path Cost
: 0
Current Max. Age(sec)
Current Forward Delay(sec)
Hello Time(sec)
STP Topology Change Count
: 20
: 15
: 2
: 0
Time Since Last Topology Change(sec) : 848
ꢂsystem
set contact
Syntax:
set contact <contact>
Description:
To set the contact description of the switch.
Argument:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<contact>:string length up to 40 characters.
Possible value:
<contact>: A, b, c, d, ... ,z and 1, 2, 3, …. etc.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (system)# set contact Taipei
set device-name
Syntax:
set device-name <device-name>
Description:
To set the device name description of the switch.
Argument:
<device-name>: string length up to 40 characters.
Possible value:
<device-name>: A, b, c, d, ... ,z and 1, 2, 3, …. etc.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (system)# set device-name CR-2600
set location
Syntax:
set location <location>
Description:
To set the location description of the switch.
Argument:
<location>: string length up to 40 characters
Possible value:
<location>: A, b, c, d, ... ,z and 1, 2, 3, …. etc.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (system)# set location Taipei
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the basic information of the switch.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(system)# show
Model Name
: FEL2P-SW26
System Description
: 24 Fast Ethernet + 2 Gigabit L2 Managed
Switch
:
Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contact
:
Device Name
System Up Time
Current Time
BIOS Version
Firmware Version
: FEL2P-SW26
: 0 Days 22 Hours 29 Mins 31 Secs
: Wed Aug 31 14:03:33 2005
: v1.03
: v2.04
Hardware-Mechanical Version : v65535.65535-v0.04
Serial Number
Host IP Address
Host MAC Address
Device Port
: 123
: 192.168.1.1
: 00-40-c7-08-00-00
: UART * 1 TP *24 Fiber * 2
: 16 M
RAM Size
Flash Size
: 2 M
ꢂtftp
set server
Syntax:
set server <ip>
Description:
To set up the IP address of tftp server.
Argument:
<ip>: the IP address of tftp server
Possible value:
<ip>: tftp server IP
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (tftp)# set server 192.168.3.111
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the information of tftp server.
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (tftp)# show
Tftp Server : 192.168.3.111
ꢂtime
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set daylightsaving
Syntax:
set daylightsaving <hr> <MM/DD/HH> <mm/dd/hh>
Description:
To set up the daylight saving.
Argument:
<hr> : daylight saving hour, range: -5 to +5
<MM> : daylight saving start Month (01-12)
<DD> : daylight saving start Day (01-31)
<HH> : daylight saving start Hour (00-23)
<mm> : daylight saving end Month (01-12)
<dd> : daylight saving end Day (01-31)
<hh> : daylight saving end Hour (00-23)
Possible value:
<hr> : -5 to +5
<MM> : (01-12)
<DD> : (01-31)
<HH> : (00-23)
<mm> : (01-12)
<dd> : (01-31)
<hh> : (00-23)
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(time)# set daylightsaving -5 10/31/00 12/31/00
FEL2P-SW26(time)# show
Current Time
NTP Server
: Tue Apr 08 10:28:54 2008
: 209.81.9.7
: 8
Timezone
Day light Saving
: -5 Hours
Day light Saving Start: Mth: 10 Day: 31 Hour: 0
Day light Saving End : Mth: 12 Day: 31 Hour: 0
set manual
Syntax:
set manual <YYYY/MM/DD> <hh:mm:ss>
Description:
To set up the current time manually.
Argument:
<YYYY> : Year (2000-2036)
<MM> : Month (01-12)
<DD> : Day (01-31)
<hh> : Hour (00-23)
<ss> : Second (00-59)
<mm> : Minute (00-59)
Possible value:
<YYYY> : (2000-2036)
<DD> : (01-31)
<mm> : (00-59)
Example:
<MM> :
<hh> :
<ss> :
(01-12)
(00-23)
(00-59)
FEL2P-SW26(time)# set manual 2008/04/08 11:24:00
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEL2P-SW26(time)# show
Current Time
: Tue Apr 08 11:24:02 2008
NTP Server
: 209.81.9.7
: 8
Timezone
Day light Saving
: -5 Hours
Day light Saving Start: Mth: 10 Day: 31 Hour: 0
Day light Saving End : Mth: 12 Day: 31 Hour: 0
FEL2P-SW26(time)#
set ntp
Syntax:
set ntp <ip> <timezone>
Description:
To set up the current time via NTP server.
Argument:
<ip>: ntp server ip address or domain name
<timezone>: time zone (GMT), range: -12 to +13
Possible value:
<timezone>: -12,-11…,0,1…,13
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(time)# set ntp 192.168.2.22 8
Synchronizing...(1)
Synchronization success
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To show the time configuration, including “Current Time”, “NTP Server”,” Timezone”,
” Daylight Saving”,” Daylight Saving Start” and “Daylight Saving End”
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(time)# show
Current Time
NTP Server
: Wed Apr 21 06:16:22 2005
: 209.81.9.7
: 8
Timezone
Day light Saving
: 4 Hours
Day light Saving Start: Mth: 2 Day: 20 Hour: 10
Day light Saving End : Mth: 3 Day: 20 Hour: 10
FEL2P-SW26 (time)#
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢂtrunk
del trunk
Syntax:
del trunk <port-range>
Description:
To remove the trunk port.
Argument:
<port-range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<port-range> : 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# del trunk 1
set hash
Syntax:
set hash <method>
Description:
To set up trunk hash method.
Argument:
<method>: lacp hash method
0: DA and SA
1: SA
2: DA
Note : This hash method applies to both LACP and static trunk.
Possible value:
<method>: 0~2
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# set hash 2
set priority
Syntax:
set priority <range>
Description:
To set up the LACP system priority.
Argument:
<range>:available from 1 to 65535.
Possible value:
<range>:1 to 65535.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# set priority 33333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set trunk
Syntax:
set trunk <port-range> <method> <group> <active LACP>
Description:
To set up the status of trunk, including the group number and mode of the trunk as
well as LACP mode.
Argument:
<port-range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<method>: <static|lacp>
static : adopt the static link aggregation
lacp : adopt the dynamic link aggregation- link aggregation control protocol
<group>: 1-3.
<active LACP>: <passive|active>
active : set the LACP to active mode
passive : set the LACP to passive mode
Possible value:
<port-range> : 1 to 26
<method>: static or lacp
<group>: 1-3.
<active LACP>: active or passive
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# set trunk 2-5 lacp 1 active
show aggtr-view
Syntax:
show aggtr-view
Description:
To display the aggregator list.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# show aggtr-view
Aggregator 1) Method: None
Member Ports: 1
Ready Ports:1
Aggregator 2) Method: LACP
Member Ports: 2
Ready Ports:
:
:
:
Publication date: March., 2011
267
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show lacp-config
Syntax:
show lacp-config
Description:
To display the value of LACP Priority.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# show lacp-config
LACP System Priority : 33333
Hash Method
: DA
show lacp-detail
Syntax:
show lacp-detail <aggtr>
Description:
To display the detailed information of the LACP trunk group.
Argument:
<aggtr> : aggregator, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<aggtr> : 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# show lacp-detail 2
Aggregator 2 Information:
Actor
--------------------------------- ---------------------------------
System Priority MAC Address System Priority MAC Address
--------------- ----------------- --------------- -----------------
Partner
32768
00-40-c7-e8-00-02
32768
00-00-00-00-00-00
Port
Key
Trunk Status
Port
Key
------ -------- ----------------- --------------- -----------------
257 ---
2
2
0
show status
Syntax:
show status
Description:
To display the aggregator status and the settings of each port.
Argument:
None.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (trunk)# show status
Trunk Port Setting
Trunk Port Status
------------------------------------- ----------------------
port Method Group Active LACP Aggtregator Status
====== ======== ======= ============= ============= ========
1
2
None
LACP
LACP
LACP
LACP
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
1
2
Ready
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
ꢂvlan
del port-group
Syntax:
del port-group <name>
Description:
To delete the port-based vlan group.
Argument:
<name>: port-vlan name
Possible value:
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<name>: port-vlan name
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# del port-group vlan-2
del tag-group
Syntax:
del tag-group <vid>
Description:
To delete the tag-based vlan group.
Argument:
<vid>: vlan ID, available from 1 to 4094
Possible value:
<vid>: 1 to 4094
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# del tag-group 2
disable double-tag
Syntax:
disable double-tag
Description:
To disable double-tag.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# disable double-tag
disable drop-untag
Syntax:
disable drop-untag <port_range>
Description:
To disable drop-untag.
Argument:
<port_range>: which port(s) you want not to drop untagged frames. Syntax: 1,5-7,
available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<port_range>: 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# disable drop-untag 2,4,5-7
disable svl
Syntax:
disable svl
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description:
To enable Independent VLAN Learning.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# disable svl
disable symmetric
Syntax:
disable symmetric
Description:
To Not drop frames from the non-member port.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# disable symmetric
enable double-tag
Syntax:
enable double-tag
Description:
To enable double-tag.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# enable double-tag
enable drop-untag
Syntax:
enable drop-untag <port_range>
Description:
To enable drop-untag.
Argument:
<port_range>: which port(s) you want to drop untagged frames. Syntax: 1,5-7,
available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<port_range>: 1 to 26
Publication date: March., 2011
271
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# enable drop-untag 2,4,5-7
enable svl
Syntax:
enable svl
Description:
To enable Shared VLAN Learning.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# enable svl
enable symmetric
Syntax:
enable symmetric
Description:
To drop frames from the non-member port.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# enable symmetric
set mgt-vlan
Syntax:
set mgt-vlan <state> [vid]
Description:
To set management vlan function on switch..
Argument:
<state> : 0 for disable; 1 for enable
<vid> : vlan id, from 1 to 4094
Possible value:
<state> : 0 for disable; 1 for enable
<vid > : 1 to 4094
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(vlan)# set mgt-vlan 1 33
FEL2P-SW26(vlan)# show mgt-vlan
Management Vlan:
State : Enable
VID : 33
FEL2P-SW26(vlan)#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
set mode
Syntax:
set mode <port | tag | metro #>
Description:
To switch vlan mode between port-based and tag-based modes.
Argument:
<tag> : set tag-based vlan
<port> : set port-based vlan
<metro> : set metro mode vlan
#: up-link port type
0: 25 port
1: 26 port
2: 25 and 26 port
Possible value:
<tag>: set tag-based vlan
<por>t: set port-based vlan
<metro> : set metro mode vlan
#: up-link port type
0: 25 port
1: 26 port
2: 25 and 26 port
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(vlan)# set mode tag 0
set port-group
Syntax:
set port-group <name> <range>
Description:
To add or edit a port-based vlan group.
Argument:
<name>: port-vlan name
<range>: vlan group members, syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
Possible value:
<range>: 1 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# set port-group vlan-1 2-5,6-10
set pvid
Syntax:
set pvid <port_range> <pvid> <default_priority>
Description:
To set vlan PVID and port pripority.
Argument:
<port_range>: which port(s) you want to set PVID(s). Syntax 1,5-7, available
from 1 to 26
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<pvid>: which PVID you want to set, available from 1 to 4094
<default_priority>: which priority you want to set, available from 0 to 7
Possible value:
<port_range>: 1 to 26
<pvid>: 1 to 4094
<default_priority>: 0 to 7
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# set pvid 3,5,6-8 5 6
set tag-group
Syntax:
set tag-group <vid> <name> <member_range> <untag_range>
Description:
To add or edit the tag-based vlan group.
Argument:
<vid>: vlan id, from 1 to 4094
<name>: tag-vlan group name
<member_range>: member port; syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 26
<untag_range>: untagged out port; syntax: 1,5-7, available from 0 to 26
set untag_range to 0 as none of the ports are force untagged
Possible value:
<vid>: 1 to 4094
<member_range>: 1 to 26
<untag_range>: 0 to 26
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# set tag-group 2 vlan-2 2-5,6,15-13 0
show config
Syntax:
show config
Description:
To display the current vlan mode, Symmetric vlan, SVL and Double tag states.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# show config
Current vlan mode:Tag-based vlan
Global setting:
Symmetric vlan : Disable (Asymmetric)
SVL
: Disable (IVL)
: Disable
Double tag
show group
Syntax:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
show group
Description:
To display vlan mode and vlan group.
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# show group
Vlan mode is tag-based.
1) Name :default
VID :1
Member:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26
Untag :1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26
2) Name :VLAN-2
VID :2
Member:2 3 4 5 6 13 14 15
Untag :
show pvid
Syntax:
show pvid
Description:
To display pvid, priority and drop untag result.
Argument:
None
Possible value:
None
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vlan)# show pvid
Port PVID Priority Drop Untag
------ ------ ---------- ------------
1
2
1
1
5
1
5
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
0
0
6
0
6
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
14
15
16
17
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
ꢂvs
disable
Syntax:
disable
Description:
To disable the virtual stack.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26(vs)# disable
enable
Syntax:
enable
Description:
To enable the virtual stack.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vs)# enable
set gid
Syntax:
set gid <gid>
Description:
To set the group id.
Argument:
<gid>: group ID
Possible value:
<gid>: a-z,A-Z,0-9
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vs)# set gid group1
set role
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syntax:
set role <master|slave>
Description:
To set role.
Argument:
<master|slave>: master: act as master, slave : act as slave
Possible value:
<master|slave>: master or slave
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vs)# set role master
show
Syntax:
show
Description:
To display the configuration of the virtual stack.
Argument:
None.
Possible value:
None.
Example:
FEL2P-SW26 (vs)# show
Virtual Stack Config:
State
Role
: Enable
: Master
Group ID : group1
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Maintenance
5-1. Resolving No Link Condition
The possible causes for a no link LED status are as follows:
ꢃ
ꢃ
ꢃ
ꢃ
The attached device is not powered on
The cable may not be the correct type or is faulty
The installed building premise cable is faulty
The port may be faulty
5-2. Q&A
1. Computer A can connect to Computer B, but cannot connect to Computer C
through the Managed Switch.
ꢄ
The network device of Computer C may fail to work. Please check the
link/act status of Computer C on the LED indicator. Try another network
device on this connection.
ꢄ
The network configuration of Computer C may be something wrong. Please
verify the network configuration on Computer C.
2. The uplink connection function fails to work.
ꢄ
The connection ports on another must be connection ports. Please check if
connection ports are used on that Managed Switch.
Please check the uplink setup of the Managed Switch to verify the uplink
function is enabled.
ꢄ
3. The console interface cannot appear on the console port connection.
ꢄ
The COM port default parameters are [Baud Rate: 57600, Data Bits: 8,
Parity Bits: None, Stop Bit: A, Flow Control: None]. Please check the COM
port property in the terminal program. And if the parameters are changed,
please set the COM configuration to the new setting.
ꢄ
ꢄ
Check the RS-232 cable is connected well on the console port of the
Managed Switch and COM port of PC.
Check if the COM of the PC is enabled.
4. How to configure the Managed Switch?
ꢄ
The “Hyperterm” is the terminal program in Win95/98/NT. Users can also use
any other terminal programs in Linux/Unix to configure the Managed Switch.
Please refer to the user guide of that terminal program. But the COM port
parameters (baud rate/ data bits/ parity bits/ flow control) must be the same
as the setting of the console port of the Managed Switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Features
•
The switch included 24-Port 10/100Mbps TP and 2-Port Gigabit Dual Media
TP/SFP or TP/GBIC.
•
•
Supports 24-port 10/100M TP ports with Nway and auto MDIX function.
MSM-6226 supports 2 Gigabit dual media ports(TP/SFP) and 2 slots for
removable SFP module supporting 1000M SFP fiber module.
•
MSM-6226 supports 2 Gigabit dual media ports(TP/GBIC) and 2 slots for
removable GBIC module supporting 1000M GBIC fiber module.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Supports on-line plug/unplug SFP/GBIC transceiver modules.
Non-blocking, store-and-forward and shared-memory L2 managed switch.
Supports auto-negotiation for configuring speed, duplex mode.
Supports 802.3x flow control for full-duplex ports.
Supports collision-based and carrier-based backpressure for half-duplex ports.
256-entry Multicast Address table.
Any ports can be in disable mode, force mode or auto-polling mode.
Per-port ingress/egress rate control with 64K/128K/256K (up to 100Mbps)
resolution.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Supports Head of Line (HOL) blocking prevention.
Supports broadcast storm filtering.
8K MAC addresses with automatic learning and aging.
Auto-aging with programmable inter-age time.
Supports 802.1p Class of Service with 4-level priority queuing.
Supports port sniffer function with 3 modes:
(TX Monitor Mode, RX Monitor Mode and TX-RX pair Monitor Mode).
Supports port-based VLAN, 802.1Q tag-based VLAN with 4K entries.
Efficient self-learning and address recognition mechanism enables forwarding
rate at wire speed.
•
•
•
Web-based management provides the ability to completely manage the switch
from any web browser.
•
•
•
•
•
•
SNMP/Telnet interface delivers complete in-band management.
Supports IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol.
Supports IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Trees.
Supports IEEE 802.1X port-based network access control.
Supports IP Multicasting to implement IGMP Snooping function.
Supports 802.3ad port trunking with flexible load distribution and failover
function.
•
•
•
•
Supports ingress port security mode for VLAN Tagged and Untagged frame
process.
Supports SNMP MIB2 and RMON sampling with sampled packet error
indication.
Power Saving with "ActiPHY Power Management" and "PerfectReach Power
Management" techniques.
Supports Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP, IEEE802.1AB)
Publication date: March., 2011
279
Revision A1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware Specifications
ꢂ
Standard Compliance: IEEE802.3ab / 802.3z / 802.3u / 802.3x
802.3z and 802.3ab compliant Gigabit Ethernet ports
ꢂ
Network Interface of Option transceiver
:
Configuration
SFP.0LC.202
Mode
Connector
Port
2(Option)
2(Option)
2(Option)
2(Option)
2(Option)
2(Option)
1000FDX
1000FDX
1000FDX
1000FDX
1000FDX
1000FDX
*LC M-M
SFP.0LC.212.XX
SFP.0BL.621.20X
GBI.ZSC.202
*LC S-M
*BiDi-LC S-M
*SC M-M
GBI.ZSC.212.XX
*SC S-M
GBI.ZSC.621.20X
* : Default module
*BiDi-SC S-M
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Transmission Mode: 10/100Mbps support full or half duplex
1000Mbps support full duplex only
Transmission Speed: 10/100/1000Mbps for TP
1000Mbps for Fiber
Full Forwarding/Filtering Packet Rate: PPS (packets per second)
Forwarding Rate
1,488,000PPS
148,800PPS
Speed
1000Mbps
100Mbps
10Mbps
14,880PPS
ꢂ
MAC Address and Self-learning: 8K address table entries,
256 VLAN table entries,
256 IP multicast table entries,
ꢂ
ꢂ
Buffer Memory: Embedded 256KB packet buffers and 128KB control memory.
Flow Control: IEEE802.3x compliant for full duplex
Backpressure flow control for half duplex
ꢂ
Cable and Maximum Length:
TP
Cat. 5 UTP cable, up to 100m
Up to 220/275/500/550m,
which depends on Multi-Mode Fiber type
1000Base-SX SC M-M
1000Base-LX SC S-M
Single-Mode Fiber, up to10/30/50Km
1000Base-FX WDM SC S-M Single Fiber, BiDi 20Km
ꢂ
Diagnostic LED:
System LED :
Power
CPURUN
ACT (LEDSET)
FDX (LEDSET)
SPD (LEDSET)
Per Port LED:
10/100M TP Port 1 to 24
: LINK/ACT, FDX, SPD
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1000M Fiber/TP Port 25,26
Power Requirement AC Line
: LINK/ACT, FDX, SPD
ꢂ
:
Voltage
Frequency
Consumption
:
:
:
100∼240 V
50∼60 Hz
15W
ꢂ Ambient Temperature
ꢂ Humidity
ꢂ Dimensions
:
:
:
-10°C ~ 60 °C
5% ~ 90%
44(H) × 442(W) × 209(D) mm
ꢂ Comply with FCC Part 15 Class A & CE Mark Approval
Management Software Specifications
Auto-negotiation support on 10/100Base-TX
ports, Web browser or console interface can
set transmission speed (10/100Mbps) and
operation mode (Full/Half duplex) on each port,
enable/disable any port, set VLAN group, set
Trunk Connection.
System Configuration
SNMP support; MIB II, Bridge MIB, RMON MIB
Management Agent
IEEE 802.1D
Spanning Tree Algorithm
Port-Base / 802.1Q-Tagged, allowed up to 256
active VLANs in one switch.
Ports trunk connections allowed
VLAN Function
Trunk Function
IP Multicast Filtering by passively snooping
on the IGMP Query.
IGMP
Supports by-port Egress/Ingress rate control
Bandwidth Control
Referred as Class of Service (CoS) by the
IEEE 802.1P standard
Four queues per port
Packet transmission schedule using Weighted
Round Robin (WRR)
Quality of Service (QoS)
User-defined weight
Classification of packet priority can be based on
either a VLAN tag on packet or a user-defined
port priority.
Limit number of MAC addresses learned per
port static MAC addresses stay in the filtering table.
Bridging : 802.1D Spanning Tree
IP Multicast : IGMP Snooping
Port Security
IP Multicast Packet Filtering
Maximum of 256 active VLANs
and IP multicast sessions
Internetworking Protocol
One RS-232 port as local control console
Telnet remote control console
SNMP agent : MIB-2 (RFC 1213)
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)
Network Management
RMON MIB (RFC 1757)-statistics
Ethernet-like MIB (RFC 1643)
Web browser support based on HTTP Server
and CGI parser TFTP software-upgrade capability.
Note: Any specification is subject to change without notice.
Publication date: March., 2011
Revision A1
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Null Modem Cable
Specifications
The DB-9 cable is used for connecting a terminal or terminal emulator to the
Managed Switch’s RS-232 port to access the command-line interface.
The table below shows the pin assignments for the DB-9 cable.
Function
Mnemonic Pin
Carrier
CD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
9 Pin Null Modem Cable
CD
1
6
4
2
3
5
7
8
4
1
6
3
2
5
8
7
9
DTR
CD
DSR
DTR
RXD
TXD
GND
RTS
CTS
DSR
TXD
RXD
GND
CTS
RTS
Reserve
Reserve 9
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|